You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

11594 lines
316KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half of the output video.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
  93. recognized by the @option{-filter}/@option{-vf} and @option{-filter_complex}
  94. options in @command{ffmpeg} and @option{-vf} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  95. @code{avfilter_graph_parse()}/@code{avfilter_graph_parse2()} functions defined in
  96. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  97. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  98. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  99. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  100. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  101. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  102. descriptions.
  103. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  104. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  105. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  106. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  107. the filter classes registered in the program.
  108. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  109. "=@var{arguments}".
  110. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  111. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
  112. @itemize
  113. @item
  114. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  115. @item
  116. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  117. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  118. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  119. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  120. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  121. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  122. @item
  123. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  124. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  125. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  126. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  127. @end itemize
  128. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  129. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  130. '|'.
  131. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "'" as initial
  132. and ending mark, and the character '\' for escaping the characters
  133. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  134. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  135. "[]=;,") is encountered.
  136. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  137. followed by a list of link labels.
  138. A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  139. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  140. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  141. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  142. associated to the output pads.
  143. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  144. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  145. created.
  146. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  147. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  148. For example in the filterchain
  149. @example
  150. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  151. @end example
  152. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  153. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  154. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  155. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  156. which are both unlabelled.
  157. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  158. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  159. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  160. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  161. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  162. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  163. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  164. to the filtergraph description.
  165. Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
  166. @example
  167. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  168. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  169. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  170. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
  171. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  172. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  173. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  174. @end example
  175. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  176. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  177. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  178. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  179. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  180. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  181. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  182. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  183. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  184. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  185. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  186. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  187. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  188. characters contained within it.
  189. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  190. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  191. @example
  192. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  193. @end example
  194. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  195. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  196. @example
  197. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  198. @end example
  199. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  200. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  201. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  202. @example
  203. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  204. @end example
  205. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  206. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  207. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  208. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  209. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  210. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  211. previous string will finally result in:
  212. @example
  213. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  214. @end example
  215. @chapter Timeline editing
  216. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  217. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  218. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  219. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  220. next filter in the filtergraph.
  221. The expression accepts the following values:
  222. @table @samp
  223. @item t
  224. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  225. @item n
  226. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  227. @item pos
  228. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  229. @item w
  230. @item h
  231. width and height of the input frame if video
  232. @end table
  233. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  234. to re-define the expression.
  235. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  236. rules.
  237. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  238. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  239. @example
  240. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  241. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  242. @end example
  243. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  244. @chapter Audio Filters
  245. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  246. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  247. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  248. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  249. build.
  250. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  251. @section adelay
  252. Delay one or more audio channels.
  253. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  254. The filter accepts the following option:
  255. @table @option
  256. @item delays
  257. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  258. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  259. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  260. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  261. @end table
  262. @subsection Examples
  263. @itemize
  264. @item
  265. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  266. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  267. @example
  268. adelay=1500|0|500
  269. @end example
  270. @end itemize
  271. @section aecho
  272. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  273. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  274. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  275. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  276. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  277. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  278. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  279. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  280. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  281. @table @option
  282. @item in_gain
  283. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  284. @item out_gain
  285. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  286. @item delays
  287. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  288. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  289. Default is @code{1000}.
  290. @item decays
  291. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  292. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  293. Default is @code{0.5}.
  294. @end table
  295. @subsection Examples
  296. @itemize
  297. @item
  298. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  299. @example
  300. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  301. @end example
  302. @item
  303. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  304. @example
  305. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  306. @end example
  307. @item
  308. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  309. @example
  310. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  311. @end example
  312. @item
  313. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  314. @example
  315. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  316. @end example
  317. @end itemize
  318. @section aeval
  319. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  320. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  321. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  322. It accepts the following parameters:
  323. @table @option
  324. @item exprs
  325. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  326. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  327. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  328. output channels.
  329. @item channel_layout, c
  330. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  331. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  332. use by default the same input channel layout.
  333. @end table
  334. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  335. @table @option
  336. @item ch
  337. channel number of the current expression
  338. @item n
  339. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  340. @item s
  341. sample rate
  342. @item t
  343. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  344. @item nb_in_channels
  345. @item nb_out_channels
  346. input and output number of channels
  347. @item val(CH)
  348. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  349. @end table
  350. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  351. dedicated filter.
  352. @subsection Examples
  353. @itemize
  354. @item
  355. Half volume:
  356. @example
  357. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  358. @end example
  359. @item
  360. Invert phase of the second channel:
  361. @example
  362. aeval=val(0)|-val(1)
  363. @end example
  364. @end itemize
  365. @section afade
  366. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  367. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  368. @table @option
  369. @item type, t
  370. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  371. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  372. @item start_sample, ss
  373. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  374. effect. Default is 0.
  375. @item nb_samples, ns
  376. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  377. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  378. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  379. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  380. @item start_time, st
  381. Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
  382. The value must be specified as a time duration; see
  383. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  384. for the accepted syntax.
  385. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample}.
  386. @item duration, d
  387. Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
  388. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  389. for the accepted syntax.
  390. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  391. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  392. the output audio will be silence.
  393. By default the duration is determined by @var{nb_samples}.
  394. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples}.
  395. @item curve
  396. Set curve for fade transition.
  397. It accepts the following values:
  398. @table @option
  399. @item tri
  400. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  401. @item qsin
  402. select quarter of sine wave
  403. @item hsin
  404. select half of sine wave
  405. @item esin
  406. select exponential sine wave
  407. @item log
  408. select logarithmic
  409. @item par
  410. select inverted parabola
  411. @item qua
  412. select quadratic
  413. @item cub
  414. select cubic
  415. @item squ
  416. select square root
  417. @item cbr
  418. select cubic root
  419. @end table
  420. @end table
  421. @subsection Examples
  422. @itemize
  423. @item
  424. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  425. @example
  426. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  427. @end example
  428. @item
  429. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  430. @example
  431. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  432. @end example
  433. @end itemize
  434. @anchor{aformat}
  435. @section aformat
  436. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  437. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  438. It accepts the following parameters:
  439. @table @option
  440. @item sample_fmts
  441. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  442. @item sample_rates
  443. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  444. @item channel_layouts
  445. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  446. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  447. for the required syntax.
  448. @end table
  449. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  450. Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
  451. @example
  452. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  453. @end example
  454. @section allpass
  455. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  456. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  457. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  458. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  459. The filter accepts the following options:
  460. @table @option
  461. @item frequency, f
  462. Set frequency in Hz.
  463. @item width_type
  464. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  465. @table @option
  466. @item h
  467. Hz
  468. @item q
  469. Q-Factor
  470. @item o
  471. octave
  472. @item s
  473. slope
  474. @end table
  475. @item width, w
  476. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  477. @end table
  478. @section amerge
  479. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  480. The filter accepts the following options:
  481. @table @option
  482. @item inputs
  483. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  484. @end table
  485. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  486. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  487. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  488. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  489. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  490. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  491. channels.
  492. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  493. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  494. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  495. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  496. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  497. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  498. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  499. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  500. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  501. shortest.
  502. @subsection Examples
  503. @itemize
  504. @item
  505. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  506. @example
  507. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  508. @end example
  509. @item
  510. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  511. @example
  512. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  513. @end example
  514. @end itemize
  515. @section amix
  516. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  517. Note that this filter only supports float samples (the @var{amerge}
  518. and @var{pan} audio filters support many formats). If the @var{amix}
  519. input has integer samples then @ref{aresample} will be automatically
  520. inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
  521. For example
  522. @example
  523. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  524. @end example
  525. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  526. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  527. It accepts the following parameters:
  528. @table @option
  529. @item inputs
  530. The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  531. @item duration
  532. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  533. @table @option
  534. @item longest
  535. The duration of the longest input. (default)
  536. @item shortest
  537. The duration of the shortest input.
  538. @item first
  539. The duration of the first input.
  540. @end table
  541. @item dropout_transition
  542. The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  543. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  544. @end table
  545. @section anull
  546. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  547. @section apad
  548. Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
  549. This can be used together with @command{ffmpeg} @option{-shortest} to
  550. extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  551. A description of the accepted options follows.
  552. @table @option
  553. @item packet_size
  554. Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
  555. @item pad_len
  556. Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
  557. value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
  558. exclusive with @option{whole_len}.
  559. @item whole_len
  560. Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
  561. the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
  562. the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
  563. with @option{pad_len}.
  564. @end table
  565. If neither the @option{pad_len} nor the @option{whole_len} option is
  566. set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
  567. indefinitely.
  568. @subsection Examples
  569. @itemize
  570. @item
  571. Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
  572. @example
  573. apad=pad_len=1024
  574. @end example
  575. @item
  576. Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
  577. the input with silence if required:
  578. @example
  579. apad=whole_len=10000
  580. @end example
  581. @item
  582. Use @command{ffmpeg} to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
  583. video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
  584. until the end in the output file when using the @option{shortest}
  585. option:
  586. @example
  587. ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
  588. @end example
  589. @end itemize
  590. @section aphaser
  591. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  592. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  593. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  594. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  595. @table @option
  596. @item in_gain
  597. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  598. @item out_gain
  599. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  600. @item delay
  601. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  602. @item decay
  603. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  604. @item speed
  605. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  606. @item type
  607. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  608. It accepts the following values:
  609. @table @samp
  610. @item triangular, t
  611. @item sinusoidal, s
  612. @end table
  613. @end table
  614. @anchor{aresample}
  615. @section aresample
  616. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  617. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  618. automatically convert between its input and output.
  619. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  620. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  621. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  622. The filter accepts the syntax
  623. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  624. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  625. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  626. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  627. @subsection Examples
  628. @itemize
  629. @item
  630. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  631. @example
  632. aresample=44100
  633. @end example
  634. @item
  635. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  636. samples per second compensation:
  637. @example
  638. aresample=async=1000
  639. @end example
  640. @end itemize
  641. @section asetnsamples
  642. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  643. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  644. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  645. signal its end.
  646. The filter accepts the following options:
  647. @table @option
  648. @item nb_out_samples, n
  649. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  650. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  651. Default value is 1024.
  652. @item pad, p
  653. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  654. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  655. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  656. @end table
  657. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  658. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  659. @example
  660. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  661. @end example
  662. @section asetrate
  663. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  664. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  665. The filter accepts the following options:
  666. @table @option
  667. @item sample_rate, r
  668. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  669. @end table
  670. @section ashowinfo
  671. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  672. The input audio is not modified.
  673. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  674. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  675. The following values are shown in the output:
  676. @table @option
  677. @item n
  678. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  679. @item pts
  680. The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  681. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  682. @item pts_time
  683. The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
  684. @item pos
  685. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  686. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  687. @item fmt
  688. The sample format.
  689. @item chlayout
  690. The channel layout.
  691. @item rate
  692. The sample rate for the audio frame.
  693. @item nb_samples
  694. The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
  695. @item checksum
  696. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
  697. audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  698. @item plane_checksums
  699. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  700. @end table
  701. @section astats
  702. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  703. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  704. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  705. It accepts the following option:
  706. @table @option
  707. @item length
  708. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  709. Default is @code{0.05} (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  710. @end table
  711. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  712. @table @option
  713. @item DC offset
  714. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  715. @item Min level
  716. Minimal sample level.
  717. @item Max level
  718. Maximal sample level.
  719. @item Peak level dB
  720. @item RMS level dB
  721. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  722. @item RMS peak dB
  723. @item RMS trough dB
  724. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  725. @item Crest factor
  726. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  727. @item Flat factor
  728. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  729. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  730. @item Peak count
  731. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  732. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  733. @end table
  734. @section astreamsync
  735. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  736. The filter accepts the following options:
  737. @table @option
  738. @item expr, e
  739. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  740. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  741. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  742. the following variables:
  743. @table @var
  744. @item b1 b2
  745. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  746. @item s1 s2
  747. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  748. @item t1 t2
  749. current timestamp of each stream
  750. @end table
  751. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  752. that has a smaller timestamp.
  753. @end table
  754. @subsection Examples
  755. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  756. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  757. @example
  758. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  759. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  760. [a2] [b2] amerge
  761. @end example
  762. @section asyncts
  763. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  764. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  765. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  766. It accepts the following parameters:
  767. @table @option
  768. @item compensate
  769. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  770. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  771. @item min_delta
  772. The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  773. adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
  774. sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  775. @item max_comp
  776. The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
  777. The default value is 500.
  778. @item first_pts
  779. Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
  780. rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
  781. no assumption is made about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or
  782. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  783. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  784. with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
  785. @end table
  786. @section atempo
  787. Adjust audio tempo.
  788. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  789. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  790. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  791. @subsection Examples
  792. @itemize
  793. @item
  794. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  795. @example
  796. atempo=0.8
  797. @end example
  798. @item
  799. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  800. @example
  801. atempo=1.25
  802. @end example
  803. @end itemize
  804. @section atrim
  805. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  806. It accepts the following parameters:
  807. @table @option
  808. @item start
  809. Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
  810. sample with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  811. @item end
  812. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  813. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  814. the last sample in the output.
  815. @item start_pts
  816. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  817. instead of seconds.
  818. @item end_pts
  819. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  820. of seconds.
  821. @item duration
  822. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  823. @item start_sample
  824. The number of the first sample that should be output.
  825. @item end_sample
  826. The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  827. @end table
  828. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  829. duration specifications; see
  830. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  831. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  832. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  833. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  834. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  835. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  836. to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  837. atrim filter.
  838. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  839. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  840. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  841. filters.
  842. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  843. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  844. Examples:
  845. @itemize
  846. @item
  847. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  848. @example
  849. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  850. @end example
  851. @item
  852. Keep only the first 1000 samples:
  853. @example
  854. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  855. @end example
  856. @end itemize
  857. @section bandpass
  858. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  859. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  860. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  861. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  862. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  863. The filter accepts the following options:
  864. @table @option
  865. @item frequency, f
  866. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  867. @item csg
  868. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  869. @item width_type
  870. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  871. @table @option
  872. @item h
  873. Hz
  874. @item q
  875. Q-Factor
  876. @item o
  877. octave
  878. @item s
  879. slope
  880. @end table
  881. @item width, w
  882. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  883. @end table
  884. @section bandreject
  885. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  886. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  887. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  888. The filter accepts the following options:
  889. @table @option
  890. @item frequency, f
  891. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  892. @item width_type
  893. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  894. @table @option
  895. @item h
  896. Hz
  897. @item q
  898. Q-Factor
  899. @item o
  900. octave
  901. @item s
  902. slope
  903. @end table
  904. @item width, w
  905. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  906. @end table
  907. @section bass
  908. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  909. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  910. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  911. The filter accepts the following options:
  912. @table @option
  913. @item gain, g
  914. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  915. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  916. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  917. @item frequency, f
  918. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  919. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  920. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  921. @item width_type
  922. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  923. @table @option
  924. @item h
  925. Hz
  926. @item q
  927. Q-Factor
  928. @item o
  929. octave
  930. @item s
  931. slope
  932. @end table
  933. @item width, w
  934. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  935. @end table
  936. @section biquad
  937. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  938. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  939. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  940. @section bs2b
  941. Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
  942. stereo audio records.
  943. It accepts the following parameters:
  944. @table @option
  945. @item profile
  946. Pre-defined crossfeed level.
  947. @table @option
  948. @item default
  949. Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
  950. @item cmoy
  951. Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
  952. @item jmeier
  953. Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
  954. @end table
  955. @item fcut
  956. Cut frequency (in Hz).
  957. @item feed
  958. Feed level (in Hz).
  959. @end table
  960. @section channelmap
  961. Remap input channels to new locations.
  962. It accepts the following parameters:
  963. @table @option
  964. @item channel_layout
  965. The channel layout of the output stream.
  966. @item map
  967. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  968. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  969. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  970. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  971. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  972. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  973. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  974. @end table
  975. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  976. output channels, preserving indices.
  977. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
  978. @example
  979. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  980. @end example
  981. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  982. the input.
  983. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  984. @example
  985. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  986. @end example
  987. @section channelsplit
  988. Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  989. It accepts the following parameters:
  990. @table @option
  991. @item channel_layout
  992. The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
  993. @end table
  994. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
  995. @example
  996. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  997. @end example
  998. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  999. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  1000. Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
  1001. @example
  1002. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  1003. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  1004. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  1005. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  1006. side_right.wav
  1007. @end example
  1008. @section compand
  1009. Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.
  1010. It accepts the following parameters:
  1011. @table @option
  1012. @item attacks
  1013. @item decays
  1014. A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  1015. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  1016. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  1017. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  1018. shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  1019. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  1020. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  1021. @item points
  1022. A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  1023. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  1024. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  1025. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  1026. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  1027. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  1028. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  1029. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  1030. @item soft-knee
  1031. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
  1032. @item gain
  1033. Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
  1034. function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
  1035. It defaults to 0.
  1036. @item volume
  1037. Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
  1038. starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1039. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1040. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1041. quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
  1042. @item delay
  1043. Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1044. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1045. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1046. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
  1047. @end table
  1048. @subsection Examples
  1049. @itemize
  1050. @item
  1051. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
  1052. noisy environment:
  1053. @example
  1054. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1055. @end example
  1056. @item
  1057. A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1058. @example
  1059. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1060. @end example
  1061. @item
  1062. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1063. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1064. @example
  1065. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1066. @end example
  1067. @end itemize
  1068. @section earwax
  1069. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1070. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1071. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1072. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1073. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1074. Ported from SoX.
  1075. @section equalizer
  1076. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1077. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1078. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1079. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1080. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1081. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1082. The filter accepts the following options:
  1083. @table @option
  1084. @item frequency, f
  1085. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1086. @item width_type
  1087. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1088. @table @option
  1089. @item h
  1090. Hz
  1091. @item q
  1092. Q-Factor
  1093. @item o
  1094. octave
  1095. @item s
  1096. slope
  1097. @end table
  1098. @item width, w
  1099. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1100. @item gain, g
  1101. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1102. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1103. @end table
  1104. @subsection Examples
  1105. @itemize
  1106. @item
  1107. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1108. @example
  1109. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1110. @end example
  1111. @item
  1112. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1113. @example
  1114. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1115. @end example
  1116. @end itemize
  1117. @section flanger
  1118. Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
  1119. The filter accepts the following options:
  1120. @table @option
  1121. @item delay
  1122. Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
  1123. @item depth
  1124. Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
  1125. @item regen
  1126. Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
  1127. Default value is 0.
  1128. @item width
  1129. Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
  1130. Default value is 71.
  1131. @item speed
  1132. Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
  1133. @item shape
  1134. Set swept wave shape, can be @var{triangular} or @var{sinusoidal}.
  1135. Default value is @var{sinusoidal}.
  1136. @item phase
  1137. Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
  1138. Default value is 25.
  1139. @item interp
  1140. Set delay-line interpolation, @var{linear} or @var{quadratic}.
  1141. Default is @var{linear}.
  1142. @end table
  1143. @section highpass
  1144. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1145. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1146. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1147. The filter accepts the following options:
  1148. @table @option
  1149. @item frequency, f
  1150. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1151. @item poles, p
  1152. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1153. @item width_type
  1154. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1155. @table @option
  1156. @item h
  1157. Hz
  1158. @item q
  1159. Q-Factor
  1160. @item o
  1161. octave
  1162. @item s
  1163. slope
  1164. @end table
  1165. @item width, w
  1166. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1167. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1168. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1169. @end table
  1170. @section join
  1171. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1172. It accepts the following parameters:
  1173. @table @option
  1174. @item inputs
  1175. The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
  1176. @item channel_layout
  1177. The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
  1178. @item map
  1179. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1180. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1181. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1182. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1183. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1184. channel.
  1185. @end table
  1186. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
  1187. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1188. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1189. Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
  1190. @example
  1191. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1192. @end example
  1193. Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1194. @example
  1195. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1196. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1197. out
  1198. @end example
  1199. @section ladspa
  1200. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1201. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1202. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1203. @table @option
  1204. @item file, f
  1205. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1206. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1207. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1208. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1209. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1210. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1211. @item plugin, p
  1212. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1213. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1214. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1215. @item controls, c
  1216. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1217. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1218. threshold or gain).
  1219. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1220. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1221. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1222. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1223. their valid ranges are printed.
  1224. @item sample_rate, s
  1225. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1226. zero inputs.
  1227. @item nb_samples, n
  1228. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1229. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1230. @item duration, d
  1231. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1232. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1233. for the accepted syntax.
  1234. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1235. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1236. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1237. supposed to be generated forever.
  1238. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1239. @end table
  1240. @subsection Examples
  1241. @itemize
  1242. @item
  1243. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1244. @example
  1245. ladspa=file=amp
  1246. @end example
  1247. @item
  1248. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1249. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1250. @example
  1251. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1252. @end example
  1253. @item
  1254. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1255. plugin library:
  1256. @example
  1257. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1258. @end example
  1259. @item
  1260. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1261. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1262. @example
  1263. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1264. @end example
  1265. @item
  1266. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1267. @example
  1268. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1269. @end example
  1270. @item
  1271. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1272. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1273. @example
  1274. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1275. @end example
  1276. @item
  1277. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1278. @example
  1279. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1280. @end example
  1281. @end itemize
  1282. @subsection Commands
  1283. This filter supports the following commands:
  1284. @table @option
  1285. @item cN
  1286. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1287. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1288. @end table
  1289. @section lowpass
  1290. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1291. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1292. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1293. The filter accepts the following options:
  1294. @table @option
  1295. @item frequency, f
  1296. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1297. @item poles, p
  1298. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1299. @item width_type
  1300. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1301. @table @option
  1302. @item h
  1303. Hz
  1304. @item q
  1305. Q-Factor
  1306. @item o
  1307. octave
  1308. @item s
  1309. slope
  1310. @end table
  1311. @item width, w
  1312. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1313. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1314. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1315. @end table
  1316. @section pan
  1317. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1318. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1319. This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
  1320. stream.
  1321. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1322. "@var{l}|@var{outdef}|@var{outdef}|..."
  1323. @table @option
  1324. @item l
  1325. output channel layout or number of channels
  1326. @item outdef
  1327. output channel specification, of the form:
  1328. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1329. @item out_name
  1330. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1331. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1332. @item gain
  1333. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1334. @item in_name
  1335. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1336. named and numbered input channels
  1337. @end table
  1338. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1339. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1340. avoiding clipping noise.
  1341. @subsection Mixing examples
  1342. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1343. factor for the left channel:
  1344. @example
  1345. pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1346. @end example
  1347. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1348. 7-channels surround:
  1349. @example
  1350. pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1351. @end example
  1352. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1353. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1354. needs.
  1355. @subsection Remapping examples
  1356. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1357. @itemize
  1358. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1359. @item only one input per channel output,
  1360. @end itemize
  1361. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1362. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1363. remapping.
  1364. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1365. dropping the extra channels:
  1366. @example
  1367. pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
  1368. @end example
  1369. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1370. and keep the input channel layout:
  1371. @example
  1372. pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
  1373. @end example
  1374. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1375. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1376. @example
  1377. pan="stereo|c1=c1"
  1378. @end example
  1379. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1380. front left and right:
  1381. @example
  1382. pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
  1383. @end example
  1384. @section replaygain
  1385. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1386. outputs it unchanged.
  1387. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1388. @section resample
  1389. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
  1390. not meant to be used directly.
  1391. @section silencedetect
  1392. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1393. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1394. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1395. minimum detected noise duration.
  1396. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1397. The filter accepts the following options:
  1398. @table @option
  1399. @item duration, d
  1400. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1401. @item noise, n
  1402. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1403. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1404. @end table
  1405. @subsection Examples
  1406. @itemize
  1407. @item
  1408. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1409. @example
  1410. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1411. @end example
  1412. @item
  1413. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1414. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1415. @example
  1416. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1417. @end example
  1418. @end itemize
  1419. @section silenceremove
  1420. Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
  1421. The filter accepts the following options:
  1422. @table @option
  1423. @item start_periods
  1424. This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
  1425. the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
  1426. beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
  1427. finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
  1428. the @var{start_periods} will be @code{1} but it can be increased to higher
  1429. values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
  1430. Default value is @code{0}.
  1431. @item start_duration
  1432. Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
  1433. trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
  1434. as silence and trimmed off. Default value is @code{0}.
  1435. @item start_threshold
  1436. This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
  1437. audio, a value of @code{0} may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
  1438. you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
  1439. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1440. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1441. @item stop_periods
  1442. Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
  1443. To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a @var{stop_periods}
  1444. that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
  1445. used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
  1446. @var{start_periods}, making it suitable for removing periods of silence
  1447. in the middle of the audio.
  1448. Default value is @code{0}.
  1449. @item stop_duration
  1450. Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
  1451. more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
  1452. the audio.
  1453. Default value is @code{0}.
  1454. @item stop_threshold
  1455. This is the same as @option{start_threshold} but for trimming silence from
  1456. the end of audio.
  1457. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1458. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1459. @item leave_silence
  1460. This indicate that @var{stop_duration} length of audio should be left intact
  1461. at the beginning of each period of silence.
  1462. For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
  1463. to remove the pauses completely. Default value is @code{0}.
  1464. @end table
  1465. @subsection Examples
  1466. @itemize
  1467. @item
  1468. The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
  1469. that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
  1470. pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
  1471. @example
  1472. silenceremove=1:5:0.02
  1473. @end example
  1474. @end itemize
  1475. @section treble
  1476. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1477. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1478. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1479. The filter accepts the following options:
  1480. @table @option
  1481. @item gain, g
  1482. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1483. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1484. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1485. @item frequency, f
  1486. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1487. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1488. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1489. @item width_type
  1490. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1491. @table @option
  1492. @item h
  1493. Hz
  1494. @item q
  1495. Q-Factor
  1496. @item o
  1497. octave
  1498. @item s
  1499. slope
  1500. @end table
  1501. @item width, w
  1502. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1503. @end table
  1504. @section volume
  1505. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1506. It accepts the following parameters:
  1507. @table @option
  1508. @item volume
  1509. Set audio volume expression.
  1510. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1511. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1512. @example
  1513. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1514. @end example
  1515. The default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1516. @item precision
  1517. This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
  1518. It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1519. precision of the volume scaling.
  1520. @table @option
  1521. @item fixed
  1522. 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1523. @item float
  1524. 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1525. @item double
  1526. 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
  1527. @end table
  1528. @item replaygain
  1529. Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
  1530. @table @option
  1531. @item drop
  1532. Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
  1533. @item ignore
  1534. Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
  1535. @item track
  1536. Prefer the track gain, if present.
  1537. @item album
  1538. Prefer the album gain, if present.
  1539. @end table
  1540. @item replaygain_preamp
  1541. Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
  1542. Default value for @var{replaygain_preamp} is 0.0.
  1543. @item eval
  1544. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1545. It accepts the following values:
  1546. @table @samp
  1547. @item once
  1548. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1549. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1550. @item frame
  1551. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1552. @end table
  1553. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1554. @end table
  1555. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1556. @table @option
  1557. @item n
  1558. frame number (starting at zero)
  1559. @item nb_channels
  1560. number of channels
  1561. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1562. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1563. @item nb_samples
  1564. number of samples in the current frame
  1565. @item pos
  1566. original frame position in the file
  1567. @item pts
  1568. frame PTS
  1569. @item sample_rate
  1570. sample rate
  1571. @item startpts
  1572. PTS at start of stream
  1573. @item startt
  1574. time at start of stream
  1575. @item t
  1576. frame time
  1577. @item tb
  1578. timestamp timebase
  1579. @item volume
  1580. last set volume value
  1581. @end table
  1582. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1583. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1584. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1585. @subsection Commands
  1586. This filter supports the following commands:
  1587. @table @option
  1588. @item volume
  1589. Modify the volume expression.
  1590. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1591. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1592. value.
  1593. @item replaygain_noclip
  1594. Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
  1595. Default value for @var{replaygain_noclip} is 1.
  1596. @end table
  1597. @subsection Examples
  1598. @itemize
  1599. @item
  1600. Halve the input audio volume:
  1601. @example
  1602. volume=volume=0.5
  1603. volume=volume=1/2
  1604. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1605. @end example
  1606. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1607. omitted, for example like in:
  1608. @example
  1609. volume=0.5
  1610. @end example
  1611. @item
  1612. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1613. @example
  1614. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1615. @end example
  1616. @item
  1617. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1618. @example
  1619. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1620. @end example
  1621. @end itemize
  1622. @section volumedetect
  1623. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1624. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1625. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1626. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1627. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1628. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1629. the samples).
  1630. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1631. @subsection Examples
  1632. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1633. @example
  1634. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1635. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1636. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1637. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1638. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1639. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1640. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1641. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1642. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1643. @end example
  1644. It means that:
  1645. @itemize
  1646. @item
  1647. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1648. @item
  1649. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1650. @item
  1651. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1652. @end itemize
  1653. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1654. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1655. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1656. @chapter Audio Sources
  1657. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1658. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1659. @section abuffer
  1660. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1661. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1662. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1663. It accepts the following parameters:
  1664. @table @option
  1665. @item time_base
  1666. The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1667. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1668. @item sample_rate
  1669. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1670. @item sample_fmt
  1671. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1672. Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
  1673. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1674. @item channel_layout
  1675. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1676. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1677. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1678. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1679. @item channels
  1680. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1681. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1682. must be consistent.
  1683. @end table
  1684. @subsection Examples
  1685. @example
  1686. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1687. @end example
  1688. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1689. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1690. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1691. equivalent to:
  1692. @example
  1693. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1694. @end example
  1695. @section aevalsrc
  1696. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1697. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1698. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1699. audio signal.
  1700. This source accepts the following options:
  1701. @table @option
  1702. @item exprs
  1703. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1704. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1705. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1706. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1707. @item channel_layout, c
  1708. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1709. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1710. @item duration, d
  1711. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1712. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1713. for the accepted syntax.
  1714. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1715. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1716. complete frame.
  1717. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1718. supposed to be generated forever.
  1719. @item nb_samples, n
  1720. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1721. default to 1024.
  1722. @item sample_rate, s
  1723. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1724. @end table
  1725. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1726. @table @option
  1727. @item n
  1728. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1729. @item t
  1730. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1731. @item s
  1732. sample rate
  1733. @end table
  1734. @subsection Examples
  1735. @itemize
  1736. @item
  1737. Generate silence:
  1738. @example
  1739. aevalsrc=0
  1740. @end example
  1741. @item
  1742. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1743. 8000 Hz:
  1744. @example
  1745. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1746. @end example
  1747. @item
  1748. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1749. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1750. @example
  1751. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1752. @end example
  1753. @item
  1754. Generate white noise:
  1755. @example
  1756. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1757. @end example
  1758. @item
  1759. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1760. @example
  1761. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1762. @end example
  1763. @item
  1764. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1765. @example
  1766. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1767. @end example
  1768. @end itemize
  1769. @section anullsrc
  1770. The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1771. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1772. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1773. synth filter).
  1774. This source accepts the following options:
  1775. @table @option
  1776. @item channel_layout, cl
  1777. Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1778. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1779. is "stereo".
  1780. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1781. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1782. channel layout values.
  1783. @item sample_rate, r
  1784. Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1785. @item nb_samples, n
  1786. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1787. @end table
  1788. @subsection Examples
  1789. @itemize
  1790. @item
  1791. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1792. @example
  1793. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1794. @end example
  1795. @item
  1796. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1797. @example
  1798. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1799. @end example
  1800. @end itemize
  1801. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1802. @section flite
  1803. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1804. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1805. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1806. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1807. The filter accepts the following options:
  1808. @table @option
  1809. @item list_voices
  1810. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1811. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1812. @item nb_samples, n
  1813. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1814. @item textfile
  1815. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1816. @item text
  1817. Set the text to speak.
  1818. @item voice, v
  1819. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1820. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1821. @end table
  1822. @subsection Examples
  1823. @itemize
  1824. @item
  1825. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthesize the text using the
  1826. standard flite voice:
  1827. @example
  1828. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1829. @end example
  1830. @item
  1831. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1832. @example
  1833. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1834. @end example
  1835. @item
  1836. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1837. @example
  1838. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1839. @end example
  1840. @item
  1841. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1842. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1843. @example
  1844. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1845. @end example
  1846. @end itemize
  1847. For more information about libflite, check:
  1848. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1849. @section sine
  1850. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1851. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1852. The filter accepts the following options:
  1853. @table @option
  1854. @item frequency, f
  1855. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1856. @item beep_factor, b
  1857. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1858. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1859. @item sample_rate, r
  1860. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1861. @item duration, d
  1862. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1863. @item samples_per_frame
  1864. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1865. @end table
  1866. @subsection Examples
  1867. @itemize
  1868. @item
  1869. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1870. @example
  1871. sine
  1872. @end example
  1873. @item
  1874. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1875. @example
  1876. sine=220:4:d=5
  1877. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1878. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1879. @end example
  1880. @end itemize
  1881. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1882. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1883. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1884. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1885. @section abuffersink
  1886. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1887. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1888. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1889. or the options system.
  1890. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1891. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1892. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1893. @section anullsink
  1894. Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1895. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  1896. tools.
  1897. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1898. @chapter Video Filters
  1899. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1900. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1901. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1902. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1903. build.
  1904. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1905. @section alphaextract
  1906. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1907. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1908. @section alphamerge
  1909. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1910. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1911. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1912. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1913. channel.
  1914. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1915. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1916. @example
  1917. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1918. @end example
  1919. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1920. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1921. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1922. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1923. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1924. @section ass
  1925. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1926. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1927. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1928. This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
  1929. the @ref{subtitles} filter:
  1930. @table @option
  1931. @item shaping
  1932. Set the shaping engine
  1933. Available values are:
  1934. @table @samp
  1935. @item auto
  1936. The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
  1937. @item simple
  1938. Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
  1939. @item complex
  1940. Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
  1941. @end table
  1942. The default is @code{auto}.
  1943. @end table
  1944. @section bbox
  1945. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1946. luminance plane.
  1947. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1948. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1949. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1950. log.
  1951. The filter accepts the following option:
  1952. @table @option
  1953. @item min_val
  1954. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1955. @end table
  1956. @section blackdetect
  1957. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1958. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1959. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1960. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1961. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1962. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1963. The filter accepts the following options:
  1964. @table @option
  1965. @item black_min_duration, d
  1966. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1967. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1968. Default value is 2.0.
  1969. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1970. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1971. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1972. @example
  1973. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1974. @end example
  1975. for which a picture is considered black.
  1976. Default value is 0.98.
  1977. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1978. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1979. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1980. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  1981. the following equation:
  1982. @example
  1983. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  1984. @end example
  1985. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  1986. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  1987. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  1988. Default value is 0.10.
  1989. @end table
  1990. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  1991. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  1992. @example
  1993. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  1994. @end example
  1995. @section blackframe
  1996. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  1997. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  1998. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  1999. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  2000. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  2001. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  2002. It accepts the following parameters:
  2003. @table @option
  2004. @item amount
  2005. The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
  2006. @code{98}.
  2007. @item threshold, thresh
  2008. The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
  2009. @code{32}.
  2010. @end table
  2011. @section blend
  2012. Blend two video frames into each other.
  2013. It takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
  2014. "top" layer and second input is "bottom" layer.
  2015. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  2016. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2017. @table @option
  2018. @item c0_mode
  2019. @item c1_mode
  2020. @item c2_mode
  2021. @item c3_mode
  2022. @item all_mode
  2023. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2024. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  2025. Available values for component modes are:
  2026. @table @samp
  2027. @item addition
  2028. @item and
  2029. @item average
  2030. @item burn
  2031. @item darken
  2032. @item difference
  2033. @item divide
  2034. @item dodge
  2035. @item exclusion
  2036. @item hardlight
  2037. @item lighten
  2038. @item multiply
  2039. @item negation
  2040. @item normal
  2041. @item or
  2042. @item overlay
  2043. @item phoenix
  2044. @item pinlight
  2045. @item reflect
  2046. @item screen
  2047. @item softlight
  2048. @item subtract
  2049. @item vividlight
  2050. @item xor
  2051. @end table
  2052. @item c0_opacity
  2053. @item c1_opacity
  2054. @item c2_opacity
  2055. @item c3_opacity
  2056. @item all_opacity
  2057. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2058. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  2059. @item c0_expr
  2060. @item c1_expr
  2061. @item c2_expr
  2062. @item c3_expr
  2063. @item all_expr
  2064. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2065. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  2066. The expressions can use the following variables:
  2067. @table @option
  2068. @item N
  2069. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  2070. @item X
  2071. @item Y
  2072. the coordinates of the current sample
  2073. @item W
  2074. @item H
  2075. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  2076. @item SW
  2077. @item SH
  2078. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  2079. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  2080. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  2081. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  2082. @item T
  2083. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  2084. @item TOP, A
  2085. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  2086. @item BOTTOM, B
  2087. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  2088. @end table
  2089. @item shortest
  2090. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  2091. @item repeatlast
  2092. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  2093. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  2094. Default is @code{1}.
  2095. @end table
  2096. @subsection Examples
  2097. @itemize
  2098. @item
  2099. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  2100. @example
  2101. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  2102. @end example
  2103. @item
  2104. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  2105. @example
  2106. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  2107. @end example
  2108. @item
  2109. Apply uncover left effect:
  2110. @example
  2111. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  2112. @end example
  2113. @item
  2114. Apply uncover down effect:
  2115. @example
  2116. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  2117. @end example
  2118. @item
  2119. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  2120. @example
  2121. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  2122. @end example
  2123. @end itemize
  2124. @section boxblur
  2125. Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  2126. It accepts the following parameters:
  2127. @table @option
  2128. @item luma_radius, lr
  2129. @item luma_power, lp
  2130. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2131. @item chroma_power, cp
  2132. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2133. @item alpha_power, ap
  2134. @end table
  2135. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2136. @table @option
  2137. @item luma_radius, lr
  2138. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2139. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2140. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  2141. corresponding input plane.
  2142. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  2143. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  2144. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  2145. planes.
  2146. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  2147. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  2148. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  2149. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  2150. @table @option
  2151. @item w
  2152. @item h
  2153. The input width and height in pixels.
  2154. @item cw
  2155. @item ch
  2156. The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
  2157. @item hsub
  2158. @item vsub
  2159. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  2160. pixel format "yuv422p", @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2161. @end table
  2162. @item luma_power, lp
  2163. @item chroma_power, cp
  2164. @item alpha_power, ap
  2165. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2166. corresponding plane.
  2167. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2168. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2169. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2170. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2171. @end table
  2172. @subsection Examples
  2173. @itemize
  2174. @item
  2175. Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
  2176. set to 2:
  2177. @example
  2178. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2179. boxblur=2:1
  2180. @end example
  2181. @item
  2182. Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2183. @example
  2184. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2185. @end example
  2186. @item
  2187. Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2188. @example
  2189. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2190. @end example
  2191. @end itemize
  2192. @section codecview
  2193. Visualize information exported by some codecs.
  2194. Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
  2195. means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
  2196. @var{export_mvs} flag in the codec @option{flags2} option.
  2197. The filter accepts the following option:
  2198. @table @option
  2199. @item mv
  2200. Set motion vectors to visualize.
  2201. Available flags for @var{mv} are:
  2202. @table @samp
  2203. @item pf
  2204. forward predicted MVs of P-frames
  2205. @item bf
  2206. forward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2207. @item bb
  2208. backward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2209. @end table
  2210. @end table
  2211. @subsection Examples
  2212. @itemize
  2213. @item
  2214. Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using @command{ffplay}:
  2215. @example
  2216. ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
  2217. @end example
  2218. @end itemize
  2219. @section colorbalance
  2220. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2221. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2222. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2223. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2224. value towards the complementary color.
  2225. The filter accepts the following options:
  2226. @table @option
  2227. @item rs
  2228. @item gs
  2229. @item bs
  2230. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2231. @item rm
  2232. @item gm
  2233. @item bm
  2234. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2235. @item rh
  2236. @item gh
  2237. @item bh
  2238. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2239. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2240. @end table
  2241. @subsection Examples
  2242. @itemize
  2243. @item
  2244. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2245. @example
  2246. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2247. @end example
  2248. @end itemize
  2249. @section colorlevels
  2250. Adjust video input frames using levels.
  2251. The filter accepts the following options:
  2252. @table @option
  2253. @item rimin
  2254. @item gimin
  2255. @item bimin
  2256. @item aimin
  2257. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
  2258. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2259. @item rimax
  2260. @item gimax
  2261. @item bimax
  2262. @item aimax
  2263. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
  2264. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{1}.
  2265. Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
  2266. (dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
  2267. @item romin
  2268. @item gomin
  2269. @item bomin
  2270. @item aomin
  2271. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
  2272. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2273. @item romax
  2274. @item gomax
  2275. @item bomax
  2276. @item aomax
  2277. Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
  2278. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{1}.
  2279. Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
  2280. @end table
  2281. @subsection Examples
  2282. @itemize
  2283. @item
  2284. Make video output darker:
  2285. @example
  2286. colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
  2287. @end example
  2288. @item
  2289. Increase contrast:
  2290. @example
  2291. colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
  2292. @end example
  2293. @item
  2294. Make video output lighter:
  2295. @example
  2296. colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
  2297. @end example
  2298. @item
  2299. Increase brightness:
  2300. @example
  2301. colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
  2302. @end example
  2303. @end itemize
  2304. @section colorchannelmixer
  2305. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2306. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2307. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2308. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2309. @example
  2310. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2311. @end example
  2312. The filter accepts the following options:
  2313. @table @option
  2314. @item rr
  2315. @item rg
  2316. @item rb
  2317. @item ra
  2318. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2319. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2320. @item gr
  2321. @item gg
  2322. @item gb
  2323. @item ga
  2324. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2325. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2326. @item br
  2327. @item bg
  2328. @item bb
  2329. @item ba
  2330. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2331. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2332. @item ar
  2333. @item ag
  2334. @item ab
  2335. @item aa
  2336. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2337. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2338. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2339. @end table
  2340. @subsection Examples
  2341. @itemize
  2342. @item
  2343. Convert source to grayscale:
  2344. @example
  2345. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2346. @end example
  2347. @item
  2348. Simulate sepia tones:
  2349. @example
  2350. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2351. @end example
  2352. @end itemize
  2353. @section colormatrix
  2354. Convert color matrix.
  2355. The filter accepts the following options:
  2356. @table @option
  2357. @item src
  2358. @item dst
  2359. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2360. specified.
  2361. The accepted values are:
  2362. @table @samp
  2363. @item bt709
  2364. BT.709
  2365. @item bt601
  2366. BT.601
  2367. @item smpte240m
  2368. SMPTE-240M
  2369. @item fcc
  2370. FCC
  2371. @end table
  2372. @end table
  2373. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2374. @example
  2375. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2376. @end example
  2377. @section copy
  2378. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
  2379. testing purposes.
  2380. @section crop
  2381. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2382. It accepts the following parameters:
  2383. @table @option
  2384. @item w, out_w
  2385. The width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2386. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2387. configuration.
  2388. @item h, out_h
  2389. The height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2390. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2391. configuration.
  2392. @item x
  2393. The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
  2394. video. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2395. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2396. @item y
  2397. The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2398. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2399. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2400. @item keep_aspect
  2401. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2402. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2403. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2404. @end table
  2405. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2406. expressions containing the following constants:
  2407. @table @option
  2408. @item x
  2409. @item y
  2410. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2411. each new frame.
  2412. @item in_w
  2413. @item in_h
  2414. The input width and height.
  2415. @item iw
  2416. @item ih
  2417. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  2418. @item out_w
  2419. @item out_h
  2420. The output (cropped) width and height.
  2421. @item ow
  2422. @item oh
  2423. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2424. @item a
  2425. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2426. @item sar
  2427. input sample aspect ratio
  2428. @item dar
  2429. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2430. @item hsub
  2431. @item vsub
  2432. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2433. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2434. @item n
  2435. The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  2436. @item pos
  2437. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2438. @item t
  2439. The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  2440. @end table
  2441. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2442. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2443. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2444. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2445. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2446. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2447. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2448. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2449. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2450. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2451. @subsection Examples
  2452. @itemize
  2453. @item
  2454. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2455. @example
  2456. crop=100:100:12:34
  2457. @end example
  2458. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2459. @example
  2460. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2461. @end example
  2462. @item
  2463. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2464. @example
  2465. crop=100:100
  2466. @end example
  2467. @item
  2468. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2469. @example
  2470. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2471. @end example
  2472. @item
  2473. Crop the input video central square:
  2474. @example
  2475. crop=out_w=in_h
  2476. crop=in_h
  2477. @end example
  2478. @item
  2479. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2480. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2481. corner of the input image.
  2482. @example
  2483. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2484. @end example
  2485. @item
  2486. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2487. the top and bottom borders
  2488. @example
  2489. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2490. @end example
  2491. @item
  2492. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2493. @example
  2494. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2495. @end example
  2496. @item
  2497. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2498. @example
  2499. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2500. @end example
  2501. @item
  2502. Apply trembling effect:
  2503. @example
  2504. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2505. @end example
  2506. @item
  2507. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2508. @example
  2509. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2510. @end example
  2511. @item
  2512. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2513. @example
  2514. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2515. @end example
  2516. @end itemize
  2517. @section cropdetect
  2518. Auto-detect the crop size.
  2519. It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
  2520. recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2521. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2522. It accepts the following parameters:
  2523. @table @option
  2524. @item limit
  2525. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2526. from nothing (0) to everything (255). An intensity value greater
  2527. to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
  2528. @item round
  2529. The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
  2530. 16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
  2531. get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2532. encoding to most video codecs.
  2533. @item reset_count, reset
  2534. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2535. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2536. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2537. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2538. indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
  2539. playback.
  2540. @end table
  2541. @anchor{curves}
  2542. @section curves
  2543. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2544. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2545. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2546. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2547. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2548. the output frame.
  2549. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2550. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2551. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2552. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2553. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2554. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2555. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2556. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2557. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2558. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2559. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2560. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2561. The filter accepts the following options:
  2562. @table @option
  2563. @item preset
  2564. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2565. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2566. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2567. Available presets are:
  2568. @table @samp
  2569. @item none
  2570. @item color_negative
  2571. @item cross_process
  2572. @item darker
  2573. @item increase_contrast
  2574. @item lighter
  2575. @item linear_contrast
  2576. @item medium_contrast
  2577. @item negative
  2578. @item strong_contrast
  2579. @item vintage
  2580. @end table
  2581. Default is @code{none}.
  2582. @item master, m
  2583. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2584. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2585. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2586. post-processing LUT.
  2587. @item red, r
  2588. Set the key points for the red component.
  2589. @item green, g
  2590. Set the key points for the green component.
  2591. @item blue, b
  2592. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2593. @item all
  2594. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2595. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2596. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2597. @option{all} setting.
  2598. @item psfile
  2599. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2600. @end table
  2601. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2602. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2603. @subsection Examples
  2604. @itemize
  2605. @item
  2606. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2607. @example
  2608. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2609. @end example
  2610. @item
  2611. Vintage effect:
  2612. @example
  2613. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2614. @end example
  2615. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2616. @table @var
  2617. @item red
  2618. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2619. @item green
  2620. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2621. @item blue
  2622. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2623. @end table
  2624. @item
  2625. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2626. @example
  2627. curves=preset=vintage
  2628. @end example
  2629. @item
  2630. Or simply:
  2631. @example
  2632. curves=vintage
  2633. @end example
  2634. @item
  2635. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2636. @example
  2637. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2638. @end example
  2639. @end itemize
  2640. @section dctdnoiz
  2641. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2642. This filter is not designed for real time.
  2643. The filter accepts the following options:
  2644. @table @option
  2645. @item sigma, s
  2646. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2647. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2648. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2649. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2650. Default is @code{0}.
  2651. @item overlap
  2652. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
  2653. may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
  2654. risk of various artefacts.
  2655. If the overlapping value doesn't allow to process the whole input width or
  2656. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2657. Default value is @var{blocksize}-1, which is the best possible setting.
  2658. @item expr, e
  2659. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2660. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2661. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2662. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2663. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2664. variable.
  2665. @item n
  2666. Set the @var{blocksize} using the number of bits. @code{1<<@var{n}} defines the
  2667. @var{blocksize}, which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
  2668. The default value is @var{3} (8x8) and can be raised to @var{4} for a
  2669. @var{blocksize} of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
  2670. on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
  2671. better de-noising.
  2672. @end table
  2673. @subsection Examples
  2674. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2675. @example
  2676. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2677. @end example
  2678. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2679. @example
  2680. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2681. @end example
  2682. Violent denoise using a block size of @code{16x16}:
  2683. @example
  2684. dctdnoiz=15:n=4
  2685. @end example
  2686. @anchor{decimate}
  2687. @section decimate
  2688. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2689. The filter accepts the following options:
  2690. @table @option
  2691. @item cycle
  2692. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2693. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2694. Default is @code{5}.
  2695. @item dupthresh
  2696. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2697. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2698. is @code{1.1}
  2699. @item scthresh
  2700. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2701. @item blockx
  2702. @item blocky
  2703. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2704. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2705. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2706. @item ppsrc
  2707. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2708. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2709. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2710. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2711. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2712. @code{0}.
  2713. @item chroma
  2714. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2715. @code{1}.
  2716. @end table
  2717. @section dejudder
  2718. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2719. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2720. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2721. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2722. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2723. rate video.
  2724. The option available in this filter is:
  2725. @table @option
  2726. @item cycle
  2727. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2728. Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2729. @table @samp
  2730. @item 4
  2731. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2732. @item 5
  2733. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2734. @item 20
  2735. If a mixture of the two.
  2736. @end table
  2737. The default is @samp{4}.
  2738. @end table
  2739. @section delogo
  2740. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2741. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2742. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2743. It accepts the following parameters:
  2744. @table @option
  2745. @item x
  2746. @item y
  2747. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2748. specified.
  2749. @item w
  2750. @item h
  2751. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2752. specified.
  2753. @item band, t
  2754. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2755. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2756. @item show
  2757. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2758. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2759. The default value is 0.
  2760. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2761. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2762. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2763. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2764. @end table
  2765. @subsection Examples
  2766. @itemize
  2767. @item
  2768. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2769. and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
  2770. @example
  2771. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2772. @end example
  2773. @end itemize
  2774. @section deshake
  2775. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2776. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2777. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2778. The filter accepts the following options:
  2779. @table @option
  2780. @item x
  2781. @item y
  2782. @item w
  2783. @item h
  2784. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2785. vectors.
  2786. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2787. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2788. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2789. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2790. box.
  2791. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2792. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2793. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2794. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2795. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2796. Default - search the whole frame.
  2797. @item rx
  2798. @item ry
  2799. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2800. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2801. @item edge
  2802. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2803. frame. Available values are:
  2804. @table @samp
  2805. @item blank, 0
  2806. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2807. @item original, 1
  2808. Original image at blank locations
  2809. @item clamp, 2
  2810. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2811. @item mirror, 3
  2812. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2813. @end table
  2814. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2815. @item blocksize
  2816. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2817. default 8.
  2818. @item contrast
  2819. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2820. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2821. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2822. @item search
  2823. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2824. @table @samp
  2825. @item exhaustive, 0
  2826. Set exhaustive search
  2827. @item less, 1
  2828. Set less exhaustive search.
  2829. @end table
  2830. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2831. @item filename
  2832. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2833. specified file.
  2834. @item opencl
  2835. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2836. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2837. @end table
  2838. @section drawbox
  2839. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2840. It accepts the following parameters:
  2841. @table @option
  2842. @item x
  2843. @item y
  2844. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
  2845. @item width, w
  2846. @item height, h
  2847. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
  2848. the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
  2849. @item color, c
  2850. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2851. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2852. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2853. video with inverted luma.
  2854. @item thickness, t
  2855. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2856. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2857. @end table
  2858. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2859. following constants:
  2860. @table @option
  2861. @item dar
  2862. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2863. @item hsub
  2864. @item vsub
  2865. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2866. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2867. @item in_h, ih
  2868. @item in_w, iw
  2869. The input width and height.
  2870. @item sar
  2871. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2872. @item x
  2873. @item y
  2874. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2875. @item w
  2876. @item h
  2877. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2878. @item t
  2879. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2880. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2881. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2882. @end table
  2883. @subsection Examples
  2884. @itemize
  2885. @item
  2886. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2887. @example
  2888. drawbox
  2889. @end example
  2890. @item
  2891. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2892. @example
  2893. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2894. @end example
  2895. The previous example can be specified as:
  2896. @example
  2897. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2898. @end example
  2899. @item
  2900. Fill the box with pink color:
  2901. @example
  2902. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2903. @end example
  2904. @item
  2905. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2906. @example
  2907. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2908. @end example
  2909. @end itemize
  2910. @section drawgrid
  2911. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2912. It accepts the following parameters:
  2913. @table @option
  2914. @item x
  2915. @item y
  2916. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2917. @item width, w
  2918. @item height, h
  2919. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2920. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2921. framed. Default to 0.
  2922. @item color, c
  2923. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2924. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2925. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2926. video with inverted luma.
  2927. @item thickness, t
  2928. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2929. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2930. @end table
  2931. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2932. following constants:
  2933. @table @option
  2934. @item dar
  2935. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2936. @item hsub
  2937. @item vsub
  2938. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2939. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2940. @item in_h, ih
  2941. @item in_w, iw
  2942. The input grid cell width and height.
  2943. @item sar
  2944. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2945. @item x
  2946. @item y
  2947. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  2948. @item w
  2949. @item h
  2950. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  2951. @item t
  2952. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  2953. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2954. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2955. @end table
  2956. @subsection Examples
  2957. @itemize
  2958. @item
  2959. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2960. @example
  2961. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  2962. @end example
  2963. @item
  2964. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  2965. @example
  2966. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  2967. @end example
  2968. @end itemize
  2969. @anchor{drawtext}
  2970. @section drawtext
  2971. Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
  2972. libfreetype library.
  2973. To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2974. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  2975. To enable default font fallback and the @var{font} option you need to
  2976. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libfontconfig}.
  2977. To enable the @var{text_shaping} option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2978. @code{--enable-libfribidi}.
  2979. @subsection Syntax
  2980. It accepts the following parameters:
  2981. @table @option
  2982. @item box
  2983. Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
  2984. The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  2985. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  2986. @item boxcolor
  2987. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  2988. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2989. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  2990. @item borderw
  2991. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  2992. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  2993. @item bordercolor
  2994. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  2995. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2996. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  2997. @item expansion
  2998. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  2999. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  3000. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  3001. below for details.
  3002. @item fix_bounds
  3003. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  3004. @item fontcolor
  3005. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  3006. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3007. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  3008. @item fontcolor_expr
  3009. String which is expanded the same way as @var{text} to obtain dynamic
  3010. @var{fontcolor} value. By default this option has empty value and is not
  3011. processed. When this option is set, it overrides @var{fontcolor} option.
  3012. @item font
  3013. The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
  3014. @item fontfile
  3015. The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
  3016. This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
  3017. @item fontsize
  3018. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  3019. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  3020. @item text_shaping
  3021. If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
  3022. right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
  3023. Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
  3024. By default 1 (if supported).
  3025. @item ft_load_flags
  3026. The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  3027. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  3028. a combination of the following values:
  3029. @table @var
  3030. @item default
  3031. @item no_scale
  3032. @item no_hinting
  3033. @item render
  3034. @item no_bitmap
  3035. @item vertical_layout
  3036. @item force_autohint
  3037. @item crop_bitmap
  3038. @item pedantic
  3039. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  3040. @item no_recurse
  3041. @item ignore_transform
  3042. @item monochrome
  3043. @item linear_design
  3044. @item no_autohint
  3045. @end table
  3046. Default value is "default".
  3047. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  3048. libfreetype flags.
  3049. @item shadowcolor
  3050. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  3051. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  3052. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  3053. @item shadowx
  3054. @item shadowy
  3055. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  3056. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  3057. values. The default value for both is "0".
  3058. @item start_number
  3059. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  3060. is "0".
  3061. @item tabsize
  3062. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  3063. Default value is 4.
  3064. @item timecode
  3065. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  3066. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  3067. option must be specified.
  3068. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  3069. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  3070. @item text
  3071. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  3072. encoded characters.
  3073. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  3074. @var{textfile}.
  3075. @item textfile
  3076. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  3077. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  3078. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  3079. parameter @var{text}.
  3080. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  3081. @item reload
  3082. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  3083. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  3084. @item x
  3085. @item y
  3086. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  3087. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  3088. output image.
  3089. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  3090. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  3091. @end table
  3092. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  3093. following constants and functions:
  3094. @table @option
  3095. @item dar
  3096. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  3097. @item hsub
  3098. @item vsub
  3099. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  3100. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  3101. @item line_h, lh
  3102. the height of each text line
  3103. @item main_h, h, H
  3104. the input height
  3105. @item main_w, w, W
  3106. the input width
  3107. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  3108. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  3109. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  3110. glyphs.
  3111. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  3112. upwards.
  3113. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  3114. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  3115. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  3116. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  3117. upwards.
  3118. @item max_glyph_h
  3119. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  3120. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  3121. @var{descent}.
  3122. @item max_glyph_w
  3123. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  3124. contained in the rendered text
  3125. @item n
  3126. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  3127. @item rand(min, max)
  3128. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  3129. @item sar
  3130. The input sample aspect ratio.
  3131. @item t
  3132. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3133. @item text_h, th
  3134. the height of the rendered text
  3135. @item text_w, tw
  3136. the width of the rendered text
  3137. @item x
  3138. @item y
  3139. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  3140. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  3141. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  3142. @end table
  3143. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  3144. @subsection Text expansion
  3145. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  3146. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  3147. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  3148. feature is deprecated.
  3149. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  3150. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  3151. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  3152. The backslash character '\', followed by any character, always expands to
  3153. the second character.
  3154. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  3155. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  3156. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  3157. they should be escaped.
  3158. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  3159. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  3160. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  3161. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  3162. problems.
  3163. The following functions are available:
  3164. @table @command
  3165. @item expr, e
  3166. The expression evaluation result.
  3167. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  3168. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  3169. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  3170. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  3171. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  3172. value.
  3173. @item expr_int_format, eif
  3174. Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.
  3175. The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the @var{expr} function.
  3176. The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are 'x', 'X', 'd' and
  3177. 'u'. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
  3178. The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
  3179. It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
  3180. @item gmtime
  3181. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  3182. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3183. @item localtime
  3184. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  3185. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3186. @item metadata
  3187. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  3188. @item n, frame_num
  3189. The frame number, starting from 0.
  3190. @item pict_type
  3191. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  3192. @item pts
  3193. The timestamp of the current frame.
  3194. It can take up to two arguments.
  3195. The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to @code{flt}
  3196. for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; @code{hms} stands
  3197. for a formatted @var{[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm} timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
  3198. The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
  3199. @end table
  3200. @subsection Examples
  3201. @itemize
  3202. @item
  3203. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  3204. optional parameters.
  3205. @example
  3206. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  3207. @end example
  3208. @item
  3209. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  3210. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  3211. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  3212. opacity of 20%.
  3213. @example
  3214. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  3215. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  3216. @end example
  3217. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  3218. within the parameter list.
  3219. @item
  3220. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  3221. @example
  3222. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  3223. @end example
  3224. @item
  3225. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  3226. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  3227. with no newlines.
  3228. @example
  3229. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  3230. @end example
  3231. @item
  3232. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  3233. @example
  3234. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  3235. @end example
  3236. @item
  3237. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  3238. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  3239. @example
  3240. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  3241. @end example
  3242. @item
  3243. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  3244. @example
  3245. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  3246. @end example
  3247. @item
  3248. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  3249. @example
  3250. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  3251. @end example
  3252. @item
  3253. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  3254. @example
  3255. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime\:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  3256. @end example
  3257. @item
  3258. Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):
  3259. @example
  3260. #!/bin/sh
  3261. DS=1.0 # display start
  3262. DE=10.0 # display end
  3263. FID=1.5 # fade in duration
  3264. FOD=5 # fade out duration
  3265. ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%@{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 @}"
  3266. @end example
  3267. @end itemize
  3268. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  3269. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  3270. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  3271. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  3272. For more information about libfribidi, check:
  3273. @url{http://fribidi.org/}.
  3274. @section edgedetect
  3275. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  3276. The filter accepts the following options:
  3277. @table @option
  3278. @item low
  3279. @item high
  3280. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  3281. algorithm.
  3282. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  3283. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3284. by the low threshold.
  3285. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be chosen in the range
  3286. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3287. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3288. is @code{50/255}.
  3289. @item mode
  3290. Define the drawing mode.
  3291. @table @samp
  3292. @item wires
  3293. Draw white/gray wires on black background.
  3294. @item colormix
  3295. Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
  3296. @end table
  3297. Default value is @var{wires}.
  3298. @end table
  3299. @subsection Examples
  3300. @itemize
  3301. @item
  3302. Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
  3303. @example
  3304. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3305. @end example
  3306. @item
  3307. Painting effect without thresholding:
  3308. @example
  3309. edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
  3310. @end example
  3311. @end itemize
  3312. @section extractplanes
  3313. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3314. separate grayscale video streams.
  3315. The filter accepts the following option:
  3316. @table @option
  3317. @item planes
  3318. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3319. Available values for planes are:
  3320. @table @samp
  3321. @item y
  3322. @item u
  3323. @item v
  3324. @item a
  3325. @item r
  3326. @item g
  3327. @item b
  3328. @end table
  3329. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3330. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3331. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3332. @end table
  3333. @subsection Examples
  3334. @itemize
  3335. @item
  3336. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3337. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3338. @example
  3339. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3340. @end example
  3341. @end itemize
  3342. @section elbg
  3343. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3344. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3345. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3346. of distinct output colors.
  3347. This filter accepts the following options.
  3348. @table @option
  3349. @item codebook_length, l
  3350. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3351. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3352. @item nb_steps, n
  3353. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3354. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3355. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3356. @item seed, s
  3357. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3358. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3359. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3360. @end table
  3361. @section fade
  3362. Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
  3363. It accepts the following parameters:
  3364. @table @option
  3365. @item type, t
  3366. The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3367. effect.
  3368. Default is @code{in}.
  3369. @item start_frame, s
  3370. Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
  3371. effect at. Default is 0.
  3372. @item nb_frames, n
  3373. The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
  3374. fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
  3375. At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
  3376. selected @option{color}.
  3377. Default is 25.
  3378. @item alpha
  3379. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3380. Default value is 0.
  3381. @item start_time, st
  3382. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3383. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3384. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3385. @item duration, d
  3386. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3387. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3388. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3389. selected @option{color}.
  3390. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
  3391. @item color, c
  3392. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3393. @end table
  3394. @subsection Examples
  3395. @itemize
  3396. @item
  3397. Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
  3398. @example
  3399. fade=in:0:30
  3400. @end example
  3401. The command above is equivalent to:
  3402. @example
  3403. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3404. @end example
  3405. @item
  3406. Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3407. @example
  3408. fade=out:155:45
  3409. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3410. @end example
  3411. @item
  3412. Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3413. @example
  3414. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3415. @end example
  3416. @item
  3417. Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3418. @example
  3419. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3420. @end example
  3421. @item
  3422. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3423. @example
  3424. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3425. @end example
  3426. @item
  3427. Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3428. @example
  3429. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3430. @end example
  3431. @end itemize
  3432. @section field
  3433. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3434. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3435. non-interlaced.
  3436. The filter accepts the following options:
  3437. @table @option
  3438. @item type
  3439. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3440. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3441. @code{bottom}).
  3442. @end table
  3443. @section fieldmatch
  3444. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3445. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3446. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3447. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3448. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3449. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3450. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3451. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3452. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3453. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3454. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3455. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3456. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3457. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3458. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3459. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3460. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3461. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3462. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3463. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3464. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3465. The @ref{decimate} filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
  3466. Do not use @code{fieldmatch} and @ref{decimate} if your input has mixed
  3467. telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
  3468. The filter accepts the following options:
  3469. @table @option
  3470. @item order
  3471. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3472. @table @samp
  3473. @item auto
  3474. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3475. @item bff
  3476. Assume bottom field first.
  3477. @item tff
  3478. Assume top field first.
  3479. @end table
  3480. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3481. stream.
  3482. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3483. @item mode
  3484. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3485. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3486. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3487. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3488. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3489. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3490. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3491. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3492. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3493. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3494. Available values are:
  3495. @table @samp
  3496. @item pc
  3497. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3498. @item pc_n
  3499. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3500. @item pc_u
  3501. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3502. @item pc_n_ub
  3503. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3504. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3505. @item pcn
  3506. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3507. @item pcn_ub
  3508. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3509. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3510. @end table
  3511. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3512. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3513. @var{top}).
  3514. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3515. the slowest.
  3516. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3517. @item ppsrc
  3518. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3519. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3520. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3521. VFM/TFM.
  3522. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3523. @item field
  3524. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3525. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3526. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3527. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3528. @table @samp
  3529. @item auto
  3530. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3531. @item bottom
  3532. Match from the bottom field.
  3533. @item top
  3534. Match from the top field.
  3535. @end table
  3536. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3537. @item mchroma
  3538. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3539. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3540. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3541. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3542. the cost of some accuracy.
  3543. Default value is @code{1}.
  3544. @item y0
  3545. @item y1
  3546. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3547. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3548. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3549. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3550. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3551. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3552. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3553. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3554. @item scthresh
  3555. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3556. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3557. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3558. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3559. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3560. @item combmatch
  3561. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3562. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3563. final match. Available values are:
  3564. @table @samp
  3565. @item none
  3566. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3567. @item sc
  3568. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3569. @item full
  3570. Use combed scores all the time.
  3571. @end table
  3572. Default is @var{sc}.
  3573. @item combdbg
  3574. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3575. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3576. Available values are:
  3577. @table @samp
  3578. @item none
  3579. No forced calculation.
  3580. @item pcn
  3581. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3582. @item pcnub
  3583. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3584. @end table
  3585. Default value is @var{none}.
  3586. @item cthresh
  3587. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3588. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3589. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3590. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3591. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3592. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3593. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3594. Default value is @code{9}.
  3595. @item chroma
  3596. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3597. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3598. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3599. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3600. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3601. Default value is @code{0}.
  3602. @item blockx
  3603. @item blocky
  3604. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3605. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3606. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3607. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3608. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3609. to 512.
  3610. Default value is @code{16}.
  3611. @item combpel
  3612. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3613. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3614. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3615. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3616. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3617. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3618. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3619. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3620. Default value is @code{80}.
  3621. @end table
  3622. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3623. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3624. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3625. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3626. @example
  3627. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3628. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3629. @end example
  3630. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3631. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3632. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3633. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3634. @example
  3635. Input stream:
  3636. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3637. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3638. Matches: c c n n c
  3639. Output stream:
  3640. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3641. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3642. @end example
  3643. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3644. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3645. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3646. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3647. looks like this:
  3648. @example
  3649. Input stream:
  3650. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3651. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3652. Matches: c c p p c
  3653. Output stream:
  3654. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3655. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3656. @end example
  3657. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3658. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3659. @itemize
  3660. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3661. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3662. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3663. @end itemize
  3664. @subsubsection u/b
  3665. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3666. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3667. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3668. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3669. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3670. @example
  3671. Match: c p n b u
  3672. x x x x x
  3673. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3674. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3675. x x x x x
  3676. Output frames:
  3677. 2 1 2 2 2
  3678. 2 2 2 1 3
  3679. @end example
  3680. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3681. @example
  3682. Match: c p n b u
  3683. x x x x x
  3684. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3685. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3686. x x x x x
  3687. Output frames:
  3688. 2 2 2 1 2
  3689. 2 1 3 2 2
  3690. @end example
  3691. @subsection Examples
  3692. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3693. @example
  3694. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3695. @end example
  3696. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3697. @example
  3698. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3699. @end example
  3700. @section fieldorder
  3701. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3702. It accepts the following parameters:
  3703. @table @option
  3704. @item order
  3705. The output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3706. for bottom field first.
  3707. @end table
  3708. The default value is @samp{tff}.
  3709. The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
  3710. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3711. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3712. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3713. flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
  3714. not alter the incoming video.
  3715. It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3716. which is bottom field first.
  3717. For example:
  3718. @example
  3719. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3720. @end example
  3721. @section fifo
  3722. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3723. It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3724. framework.
  3725. It does not take parameters.
  3726. @anchor{format}
  3727. @section format
  3728. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3729. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
  3730. the next filter.
  3731. It accepts the following parameters:
  3732. @table @option
  3733. @item pix_fmts
  3734. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  3735. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3736. @end table
  3737. @subsection Examples
  3738. @itemize
  3739. @item
  3740. Convert the input video to the @var{yuv420p} format
  3741. @example
  3742. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3743. @end example
  3744. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3745. @example
  3746. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3747. @end example
  3748. @end itemize
  3749. @anchor{fps}
  3750. @section fps
  3751. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3752. frames as necessary.
  3753. It accepts the following parameters:
  3754. @table @option
  3755. @item fps
  3756. The desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3757. @item round
  3758. Rounding method.
  3759. Possible values are:
  3760. @table @option
  3761. @item zero
  3762. zero round towards 0
  3763. @item inf
  3764. round away from 0
  3765. @item down
  3766. round towards -infinity
  3767. @item up
  3768. round towards +infinity
  3769. @item near
  3770. round to nearest
  3771. @end table
  3772. The default is @code{near}.
  3773. @item start_time
  3774. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3775. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3776. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3777. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3778. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3779. frames with a negative PTS.
  3780. @end table
  3781. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3782. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3783. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3784. @subsection Examples
  3785. @itemize
  3786. @item
  3787. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3788. @example
  3789. fps=fps=25
  3790. @end example
  3791. @item
  3792. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3793. @example
  3794. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3795. @end example
  3796. @end itemize
  3797. @section framepack
  3798. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3799. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3800. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3801. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3802. @ref{fps} filters.
  3803. It accepts the following parameters:
  3804. @table @option
  3805. @item format
  3806. The desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3807. @table @option
  3808. @item sbs
  3809. The views are next to each other (default).
  3810. @item tab
  3811. The views are on top of each other.
  3812. @item lines
  3813. The views are packed by line.
  3814. @item columns
  3815. The views are packed by column.
  3816. @item frameseq
  3817. The views are temporally interleaved.
  3818. @end table
  3819. @end table
  3820. Some examples:
  3821. @example
  3822. # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
  3823. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  3824. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
  3825. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  3826. @end example
  3827. @section framestep
  3828. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  3829. This filter accepts the following option:
  3830. @table @option
  3831. @item step
  3832. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  3833. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  3834. @end table
  3835. @anchor{frei0r}
  3836. @section frei0r
  3837. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  3838. To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
  3839. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  3840. It accepts the following parameters:
  3841. @table @option
  3842. @item filter_name
  3843. The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  3844. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
  3845. directories specified by the colon-separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH}.
  3846. Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
  3847. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  3848. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  3849. @item filter_params
  3850. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  3851. @end table
  3852. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
  3853. "y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
  3854. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, where @var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} are floating point
  3855. numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  3856. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as @var{X}/@var{Y}, where
  3857. @var{X} and @var{Y} are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
  3858. The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  3859. effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
  3860. @subsection Examples
  3861. @itemize
  3862. @item
  3863. Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
  3864. @example
  3865. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  3866. @end example
  3867. @item
  3868. Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
  3869. @example
  3870. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  3871. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  3872. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  3873. @end example
  3874. @item
  3875. Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
  3876. positions:
  3877. @example
  3878. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  3879. @end example
  3880. @end itemize
  3881. For more information, see
  3882. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  3883. @section fspp
  3884. Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of @ref{spp}.
  3885. It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
  3886. processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
  3887. This allows for much higher speed.
  3888. The filter accepts the following options:
  3889. @table @option
  3890. @item quality
  3891. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  3892. an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is @code{4}.
  3893. @item qp
  3894. Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
  3895. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
  3896. @item strength
  3897. Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
  3898. more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
  3899. but also blurrier. Default value is @code{0} − PSNR optimal.
  3900. @item use_bframe_qp
  3901. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  3902. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  3903. @code{0} (not enabled).
  3904. @end table
  3905. @section geq
  3906. The filter accepts the following options:
  3907. @table @option
  3908. @item lum_expr, lum
  3909. Set the luminance expression.
  3910. @item cb_expr, cb
  3911. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  3912. @item cr_expr, cr
  3913. Set the chrominance red expression.
  3914. @item alpha_expr, a
  3915. Set the alpha expression.
  3916. @item red_expr, r
  3917. Set the red expression.
  3918. @item green_expr, g
  3919. Set the green expression.
  3920. @item blue_expr, b
  3921. Set the blue expression.
  3922. @end table
  3923. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  3924. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  3925. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  3926. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  3927. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  3928. colorspace.
  3929. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  3930. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  3931. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  3932. to the luminance expression.
  3933. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  3934. @table @option
  3935. @item N
  3936. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  3937. @item X
  3938. @item Y
  3939. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3940. @item W
  3941. @item H
  3942. The width and height of the image.
  3943. @item SW
  3944. @item SH
  3945. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  3946. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  3947. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  3948. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  3949. @item T
  3950. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  3951. @item p(x, y)
  3952. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  3953. plane.
  3954. @item lum(x, y)
  3955. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  3956. plane.
  3957. @item cb(x, y)
  3958. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3959. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3960. @item cr(x, y)
  3961. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3962. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3963. @item r(x, y)
  3964. @item g(x, y)
  3965. @item b(x, y)
  3966. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3967. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  3968. @item alpha(x, y)
  3969. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  3970. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3971. @end table
  3972. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  3973. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  3974. @subsection Examples
  3975. @itemize
  3976. @item
  3977. Flip the image horizontally:
  3978. @example
  3979. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  3980. @end example
  3981. @item
  3982. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  3983. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  3984. @example
  3985. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  3986. @end example
  3987. @item
  3988. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  3989. @example
  3990. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  3991. @end example
  3992. @item
  3993. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  3994. @example
  3995. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  3996. @end example
  3997. @item
  3998. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  3999. @example
  4000. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  4001. @end example
  4002. @item
  4003. Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
  4004. the @ref{vignette} filter):
  4005. @example
  4006. geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
  4007. @end example
  4008. @item
  4009. Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
  4010. compose with @ref{overlay}. In this example the video will gradually
  4011. become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
  4012. by the linear gradient:
  4013. @example
  4014. ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
  4015. @end example
  4016. @end itemize
  4017. @section gradfun
  4018. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  4019. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  4020. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  4021. dither them.
  4022. It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  4023. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  4024. bring back the bands.
  4025. It accepts the following parameters:
  4026. @table @option
  4027. @item strength
  4028. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
  4029. the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
  4030. .51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
  4031. valid range.
  4032. @item radius
  4033. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  4034. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  4035. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
  4036. values will be clipped to the valid range.
  4037. @end table
  4038. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  4039. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  4040. @subsection Examples
  4041. @itemize
  4042. @item
  4043. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  4044. @example
  4045. gradfun=3.5:8
  4046. @end example
  4047. @item
  4048. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  4049. value):
  4050. @example
  4051. gradfun=radius=8
  4052. @end example
  4053. @end itemize
  4054. @anchor{haldclut}
  4055. @section haldclut
  4056. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  4057. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  4058. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  4059. The filter accepts the following options:
  4060. @table @option
  4061. @item shortest
  4062. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  4063. @item repeatlast
  4064. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  4065. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  4066. Default is @code{1}.
  4067. @end table
  4068. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  4069. filters share the same internals).
  4070. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  4071. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  4072. @subsection Workflow examples
  4073. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  4074. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  4075. @example
  4076. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  4077. @end example
  4078. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  4079. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  4080. @example
  4081. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  4082. @end example
  4083. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  4084. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  4085. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  4086. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  4087. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  4088. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  4089. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  4090. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  4091. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  4092. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  4093. @code{haldclut} filter:
  4094. @example
  4095. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  4096. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  4097. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  4098. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  4099. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  4100. @end example
  4101. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  4102. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  4103. the color changes.
  4104. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  4105. @example
  4106. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  4107. @end example
  4108. @section hflip
  4109. Flip the input video horizontally.
  4110. For example, to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  4111. @example
  4112. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  4113. @end example
  4114. @section histeq
  4115. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  4116. per-frame basis.
  4117. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  4118. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  4119. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  4120. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  4121. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  4122. video.
  4123. The filter accepts the following options:
  4124. @table @option
  4125. @item strength
  4126. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  4127. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  4128. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  4129. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  4130. @item intensity
  4131. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  4132. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  4133. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  4134. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  4135. @item antibanding
  4136. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  4137. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  4138. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  4139. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  4140. @end table
  4141. @section histogram
  4142. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  4143. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  4144. distribution in an image.
  4145. The filter accepts the following options:
  4146. @table @option
  4147. @item mode
  4148. Set histogram mode.
  4149. It accepts the following values:
  4150. @table @samp
  4151. @item levels
  4152. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  4153. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  4154. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  4155. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  4156. @item color
  4157. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  4158. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  4159. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  4160. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  4161. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  4162. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  4163. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  4164. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  4165. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  4166. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  4167. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  4168. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  4169. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  4170. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  4171. the edge of the square.
  4172. @item color2
  4173. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  4174. are displayed.
  4175. @item waveform
  4176. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  4177. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  4178. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  4179. side represents value = 255.
  4180. @end table
  4181. Default value is @code{levels}.
  4182. @item level_height
  4183. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  4184. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  4185. @item scale_height
  4186. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  4187. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  4188. @item step
  4189. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  4190. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  4191. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  4192. @item waveform_mode
  4193. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  4194. Default is @code{row}.
  4195. @item waveform_mirror
  4196. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  4197. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  4198. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  4199. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  4200. @item display_mode
  4201. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  4202. It accepts the following values:
  4203. @table @samp
  4204. @item parade
  4205. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  4206. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  4207. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  4208. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  4209. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  4210. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  4211. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  4212. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  4213. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  4214. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  4215. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  4216. @item overlay
  4217. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  4218. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  4219. over one another.
  4220. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  4221. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  4222. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  4223. or blacks.
  4224. @end table
  4225. Default is @code{parade}.
  4226. @item levels_mode
  4227. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  4228. Default is @code{linear}.
  4229. @end table
  4230. @subsection Examples
  4231. @itemize
  4232. @item
  4233. Calculate and draw histogram:
  4234. @example
  4235. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  4236. @end example
  4237. @end itemize
  4238. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  4239. @section hqdn3d
  4240. This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
  4241. image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
  4242. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  4243. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4244. @table @option
  4245. @item luma_spatial
  4246. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
  4247. It defaults to 4.0.
  4248. @item chroma_spatial
  4249. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
  4250. It defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4251. @item luma_tmp
  4252. A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4253. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4254. @item chroma_tmp
  4255. A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4256. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}.
  4257. @end table
  4258. @section hqx
  4259. Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
  4260. was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
  4261. It accepts the following option:
  4262. @table @option
  4263. @item n
  4264. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{hq2x}, @code{3} for
  4265. @code{hq3x} and @code{4} for @code{hq4x}.
  4266. Default is @code{3}.
  4267. @end table
  4268. @section hue
  4269. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  4270. It accepts the following parameters:
  4271. @table @option
  4272. @item h
  4273. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  4274. and defaults to "0".
  4275. @item s
  4276. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4277. defaults to "1".
  4278. @item H
  4279. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  4280. expression, and defaults to "0".
  4281. @item b
  4282. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4283. defaults to "0".
  4284. @end table
  4285. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  4286. specified at the same time.
  4287. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  4288. expressions containing the following constants:
  4289. @table @option
  4290. @item n
  4291. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  4292. @item pts
  4293. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  4294. @item r
  4295. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  4296. @item t
  4297. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4298. @item tb
  4299. time base of the input video
  4300. @end table
  4301. @subsection Examples
  4302. @itemize
  4303. @item
  4304. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  4305. @example
  4306. hue=h=90:s=1
  4307. @end example
  4308. @item
  4309. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  4310. @example
  4311. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  4312. @end example
  4313. @item
  4314. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  4315. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  4316. @example
  4317. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  4318. @end example
  4319. @item
  4320. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  4321. @example
  4322. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  4323. @end example
  4324. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  4325. @example
  4326. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  4327. @end example
  4328. @item
  4329. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  4330. @example
  4331. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  4332. @end example
  4333. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  4334. @example
  4335. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  4336. @end example
  4337. @end itemize
  4338. @subsection Commands
  4339. This filter supports the following commands:
  4340. @table @option
  4341. @item b
  4342. @item s
  4343. @item h
  4344. @item H
  4345. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  4346. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4347. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4348. value.
  4349. @end table
  4350. @section idet
  4351. Detect video interlacing type.
  4352. This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
  4353. top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
  4354. repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
  4355. Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
  4356. Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
  4357. The filter will log these metadata values:
  4358. @table @option
  4359. @item single.current_frame
  4360. Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
  4361. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4362. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4363. @item single.tff
  4364. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
  4365. @item multiple.tff
  4366. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4367. @item single.bff
  4368. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
  4369. @item multiple.current_frame
  4370. Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
  4371. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4372. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4373. @item multiple.bff
  4374. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4375. @item single.progressive
  4376. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
  4377. @item multiple.progressive
  4378. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
  4379. @item single.undetermined
  4380. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
  4381. @item multiple.undetermined
  4382. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
  4383. @item repeated.current_frame
  4384. Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of ``neither'', ``top'', or ``bottom''.
  4385. @item repeated.neither
  4386. Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
  4387. @item repeated.top
  4388. Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame's top field.
  4389. @item repeated.bottom
  4390. Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame's bottom field.
  4391. @end table
  4392. The filter accepts the following options:
  4393. @table @option
  4394. @item intl_thres
  4395. Set interlacing threshold.
  4396. @item prog_thres
  4397. Set progressive threshold.
  4398. @item repeat_thres
  4399. Threshold for repeated field detection.
  4400. @item half_life
  4401. Number of frames after which a given frame's contribution to the
  4402. statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it's
  4403. classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
  4404. full weight of 1.0 forever.
  4405. @end table
  4406. @section il
  4407. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4408. This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
  4409. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4410. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4411. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4412. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4413. The filter accepts the following options:
  4414. @table @option
  4415. @item luma_mode, l
  4416. @item chroma_mode, c
  4417. @item alpha_mode, a
  4418. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4419. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4420. @table @samp
  4421. @item none
  4422. Do nothing.
  4423. @item deinterleave, d
  4424. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4425. @item interleave, i
  4426. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4427. @end table
  4428. Default value is @code{none}.
  4429. @item luma_swap, ls
  4430. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4431. @item alpha_swap, as
  4432. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4433. @end table
  4434. @section interlace
  4435. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4436. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4437. halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
  4438. @example
  4439. Original Original New Frame
  4440. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4441. ========== =========== ==================
  4442. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4443. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4444. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4445. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4446. ... ... ...
  4447. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4448. @end example
  4449. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4450. @table @option
  4451. @item scan
  4452. This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
  4453. (tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4454. @item lowpass
  4455. Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
  4456. interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
  4457. @end table
  4458. @section kerndeint
  4459. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4460. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4461. progressive frames.
  4462. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4463. @table @option
  4464. @item thresh
  4465. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4466. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4467. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4468. applying the process on every pixels.
  4469. @item map
  4470. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4471. Default is 0.
  4472. @item order
  4473. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4474. 0. Default is 0.
  4475. @item sharp
  4476. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4477. @item twoway
  4478. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4479. @end table
  4480. @subsection Examples
  4481. @itemize
  4482. @item
  4483. Apply default values:
  4484. @example
  4485. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4486. @end example
  4487. @item
  4488. Enable additional sharpening:
  4489. @example
  4490. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4491. @end example
  4492. @item
  4493. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4494. @example
  4495. kerndeint=map=1
  4496. @end example
  4497. @end itemize
  4498. @section lenscorrection
  4499. Correct radial lens distortion
  4500. This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
  4501. of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
  4502. one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
  4503. To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
  4504. and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
  4505. Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
  4506. Digikam from the KDE project.
  4507. In contrast to the @ref{vignette} filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
  4508. this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas @ref{vignette} corrects the
  4509. brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
  4510. cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
  4511. be applied before or after lens correction.
  4512. @subsection Options
  4513. The filter accepts the following options:
  4514. @table @option
  4515. @item cx
  4516. Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4517. distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4518. width.
  4519. @item cy
  4520. Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4521. distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4522. height.
  4523. @item k1
  4524. Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4525. @item k2
  4526. Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4527. @end table
  4528. The formula that generates the correction is:
  4529. @var{r_src} = @var{r_tgt} * (1 + @var{k1} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^2 + @var{k2} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^4)
  4530. where @var{r_0} is halve of the image diagonal and @var{r_src} and @var{r_tgt} are the
  4531. distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
  4532. @anchor{lut3d}
  4533. @section lut3d
  4534. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4535. The filter accepts the following options:
  4536. @table @option
  4537. @item file
  4538. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4539. Currently supported formats:
  4540. @table @samp
  4541. @item 3dl
  4542. AfterEffects
  4543. @item cube
  4544. Iridas
  4545. @item dat
  4546. DaVinci
  4547. @item m3d
  4548. Pandora
  4549. @end table
  4550. @item interp
  4551. Select interpolation mode.
  4552. Available values are:
  4553. @table @samp
  4554. @item nearest
  4555. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4556. @item trilinear
  4557. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4558. @item tetrahedral
  4559. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4560. @end table
  4561. @end table
  4562. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4563. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4564. to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
  4565. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4566. to an RGB input video.
  4567. These filters accept the following parameters:
  4568. @table @option
  4569. @item c0
  4570. set first pixel component expression
  4571. @item c1
  4572. set second pixel component expression
  4573. @item c2
  4574. set third pixel component expression
  4575. @item c3
  4576. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4577. @item r
  4578. set red component expression
  4579. @item g
  4580. set green component expression
  4581. @item b
  4582. set blue component expression
  4583. @item a
  4584. alpha component expression
  4585. @item y
  4586. set Y/luminance component expression
  4587. @item u
  4588. set U/Cb component expression
  4589. @item v
  4590. set V/Cr component expression
  4591. @end table
  4592. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4593. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4594. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4595. format in input.
  4596. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4597. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4598. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4599. @table @option
  4600. @item w
  4601. @item h
  4602. The input width and height.
  4603. @item val
  4604. The input value for the pixel component.
  4605. @item clipval
  4606. The input value, clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4607. @item maxval
  4608. The maximum value for the pixel component.
  4609. @item minval
  4610. The minimum value for the pixel component.
  4611. @item negval
  4612. The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
  4613. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range; it corresponds to the expression
  4614. "maxval-clipval+minval".
  4615. @item clip(val)
  4616. The computed value in @var{val}, clipped to the
  4617. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4618. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4619. The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
  4620. clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range. It corresponds to the
  4621. expression
  4622. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4623. @end table
  4624. All expressions default to "val".
  4625. @subsection Examples
  4626. @itemize
  4627. @item
  4628. Negate input video:
  4629. @example
  4630. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4631. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4632. @end example
  4633. The above is the same as:
  4634. @example
  4635. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4636. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4637. @end example
  4638. @item
  4639. Negate luminance:
  4640. @example
  4641. lutyuv=y=negval
  4642. @end example
  4643. @item
  4644. Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
  4645. @example
  4646. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4647. @end example
  4648. @item
  4649. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4650. @example
  4651. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4652. @end example
  4653. @item
  4654. Remove green and blue components:
  4655. @example
  4656. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4657. @end example
  4658. @item
  4659. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4660. @example
  4661. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4662. @end example
  4663. @item
  4664. Correct luminance gamma by a factor of 0.5:
  4665. @example
  4666. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4667. @end example
  4668. @item
  4669. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4670. @example
  4671. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4672. @end example
  4673. @end itemize
  4674. @section mergeplanes
  4675. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4676. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4677. planes to the output video.
  4678. This filter accepts the following options:
  4679. @table @option
  4680. @item mapping
  4681. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4682. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4683. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4684. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4685. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4686. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4687. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4688. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4689. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4690. @item format
  4691. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4692. @end table
  4693. @subsection Examples
  4694. @itemize
  4695. @item
  4696. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4697. @example
  4698. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4699. @end example
  4700. @item
  4701. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4702. @example
  4703. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4704. @end example
  4705. @item
  4706. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4707. @example
  4708. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4709. @end example
  4710. @item
  4711. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4712. @example
  4713. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4714. @end example
  4715. @item
  4716. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4717. @example
  4718. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4719. @end example
  4720. @end itemize
  4721. @section mcdeint
  4722. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4723. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4724. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4725. This filter accepts the following options:
  4726. @table @option
  4727. @item mode
  4728. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4729. It accepts one of the following values:
  4730. @table @samp
  4731. @item fast
  4732. @item medium
  4733. @item slow
  4734. use iterative motion estimation
  4735. @item extra_slow
  4736. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4737. @end table
  4738. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4739. @item parity
  4740. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4741. one of the following values:
  4742. @table @samp
  4743. @item 0, tff
  4744. assume top field first
  4745. @item 1, bff
  4746. assume bottom field first
  4747. @end table
  4748. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4749. @item qp
  4750. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4751. encoder.
  4752. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4753. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4754. @end table
  4755. @section mp
  4756. Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
  4757. This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
  4758. MPlayer/MEncoder.
  4759. This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
  4760. may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
  4761. be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
  4762. depending on them when writing portable scripts.
  4763. The filter accepts the parameters:
  4764. @var{filter_name}[:=]@var{filter_params}
  4765. @var{filter_name} is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
  4766. @var{filter_params} is a string containing the parameters accepted by
  4767. the named filter.
  4768. The list of the currently supported filters follows:
  4769. @table @var
  4770. @item eq2
  4771. @item eq
  4772. @item ilpack
  4773. @item pp7
  4774. @item softpulldown
  4775. @end table
  4776. The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
  4777. of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
  4778. the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
  4779. @subsection Examples
  4780. @itemize
  4781. @item
  4782. Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
  4783. @example
  4784. mp=eq2=1.0:2:0.5
  4785. @end example
  4786. @end itemize
  4787. See also mplayer(1), @url{http://www.mplayerhq.hu/}.
  4788. @section mpdecimate
  4789. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4790. order to reduce frame rate.
  4791. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4792. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4793. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4794. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4795. @table @option
  4796. @item max
  4797. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4798. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4799. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4800. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4801. Default value is 0.
  4802. @item hi
  4803. @item lo
  4804. @item frac
  4805. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4806. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4807. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4808. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4809. out differently over the block.
  4810. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4811. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4812. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4813. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4814. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4815. @end table
  4816. @section negate
  4817. Negate input video.
  4818. It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
  4819. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4820. @section noformat
  4821. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4822. input to the next filter.
  4823. It accepts the following parameters:
  4824. @table @option
  4825. @item pix_fmts
  4826. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  4827. apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4828. @end table
  4829. @subsection Examples
  4830. @itemize
  4831. @item
  4832. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4833. input to the vflip filter:
  4834. @example
  4835. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4836. @end example
  4837. @item
  4838. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4839. @example
  4840. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4841. @end example
  4842. @end itemize
  4843. @section noise
  4844. Add noise on video input frame.
  4845. The filter accepts the following options:
  4846. @table @option
  4847. @item all_seed
  4848. @item c0_seed
  4849. @item c1_seed
  4850. @item c2_seed
  4851. @item c3_seed
  4852. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4853. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  4854. @item all_strength, alls
  4855. @item c0_strength, c0s
  4856. @item c1_strength, c1s
  4857. @item c2_strength, c2s
  4858. @item c3_strength, c3s
  4859. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4860. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  4861. @item all_flags, allf
  4862. @item c0_flags, c0f
  4863. @item c1_flags, c1f
  4864. @item c2_flags, c2f
  4865. @item c3_flags, c3f
  4866. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  4867. Available values for component flags are:
  4868. @table @samp
  4869. @item a
  4870. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  4871. @item p
  4872. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  4873. @item t
  4874. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  4875. @item u
  4876. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  4877. @end table
  4878. @end table
  4879. @subsection Examples
  4880. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  4881. @example
  4882. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  4883. @end example
  4884. @section null
  4885. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  4886. @section ocv
  4887. Apply a video transform using libopencv.
  4888. To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
  4889. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  4890. It accepts the following parameters:
  4891. @table @option
  4892. @item filter_name
  4893. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  4894. @item filter_params
  4895. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
  4896. values are assumed.
  4897. @end table
  4898. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  4899. information:
  4900. @url{http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html}
  4901. Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
  4902. @anchor{dilate}
  4903. @subsection dilate
  4904. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4905. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  4906. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  4907. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  4908. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  4909. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  4910. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  4911. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element. @var{shape}
  4912. must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
  4913. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  4914. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  4915. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  4916. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  4917. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  4918. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  4919. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  4920. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  4921. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  4922. Some examples:
  4923. @example
  4924. # Use the default values
  4925. ocv=dilate
  4926. # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
  4927. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  4928. # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
  4929. # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
  4930. # *
  4931. # ***
  4932. # *****
  4933. # ***
  4934. # *
  4935. # The specified columns and rows are ignored
  4936. # but the anchor point coordinates are not
  4937. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  4938. @end example
  4939. @subsection erode
  4940. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4941. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  4942. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  4943. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  4944. @subsection smooth
  4945. Smooth the input video.
  4946. The filter takes the following parameters:
  4947. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  4948. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
  4949. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  4950. or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  4951. The meaning of @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4}
  4952. depend on the smooth type. @var{param1} and
  4953. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0. @var{param3} and
  4954. @var{param4} accept floating point values.
  4955. The default value for @var{param1} is 3. The default value for the
  4956. other parameters is 0.
  4957. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  4958. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  4959. @anchor{overlay}
  4960. @section overlay
  4961. Overlay one video on top of another.
  4962. It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
  4963. video on which the second input is overlaid.
  4964. It accepts the following parameters:
  4965. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4966. @table @option
  4967. @item x
  4968. @item y
  4969. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
  4970. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  4971. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  4972. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  4973. @item eof_action
  4974. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
  4975. one of the following values:
  4976. @table @option
  4977. @item repeat
  4978. Repeat the last frame (the default).
  4979. @item endall
  4980. End both streams.
  4981. @item pass
  4982. Pass the main input through.
  4983. @end table
  4984. @item eval
  4985. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  4986. It accepts the following values:
  4987. @table @samp
  4988. @item init
  4989. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  4990. when a command is processed
  4991. @item frame
  4992. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  4993. @end table
  4994. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  4995. @item shortest
  4996. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  4997. terminates. Default value is 0.
  4998. @item format
  4999. Set the format for the output video.
  5000. It accepts the following values:
  5001. @table @samp
  5002. @item yuv420
  5003. force YUV420 output
  5004. @item yuv422
  5005. force YUV422 output
  5006. @item yuv444
  5007. force YUV444 output
  5008. @item rgb
  5009. force RGB output
  5010. @end table
  5011. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  5012. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  5013. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  5014. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  5015. @option{format} instead.
  5016. @item repeatlast
  5017. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  5018. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  5019. behavior. Default value is 1.
  5020. @end table
  5021. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  5022. parameters.
  5023. @table @option
  5024. @item main_w, W
  5025. @item main_h, H
  5026. The main input width and height.
  5027. @item overlay_w, w
  5028. @item overlay_h, h
  5029. The overlay input width and height.
  5030. @item x
  5031. @item y
  5032. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  5033. each new frame.
  5034. @item hsub
  5035. @item vsub
  5036. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  5037. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  5038. @var{vsub} is 1.
  5039. @item n
  5040. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  5041. @item pos
  5042. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  5043. @item t
  5044. The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  5045. @end table
  5046. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  5047. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  5048. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  5049. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  5050. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  5051. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  5052. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
  5053. the @var{movie} filter does.
  5054. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  5055. efficiency of such approach.
  5056. @subsection Commands
  5057. This filter supports the following commands:
  5058. @table @option
  5059. @item x
  5060. @item y
  5061. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  5062. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5063. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5064. value.
  5065. @end table
  5066. @subsection Examples
  5067. @itemize
  5068. @item
  5069. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  5070. video:
  5071. @example
  5072. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  5073. @end example
  5074. Using named options the example above becomes:
  5075. @example
  5076. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  5077. @end example
  5078. @item
  5079. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  5080. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  5081. @example
  5082. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  5083. @end example
  5084. @item
  5085. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  5086. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  5087. @example
  5088. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  5089. @end example
  5090. @item
  5091. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; @code{WxH}
  5092. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  5093. @example
  5094. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  5095. @end example
  5096. @item
  5097. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  5098. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  5099. @example
  5100. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  5101. @end example
  5102. The above command is the same as:
  5103. @example
  5104. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  5105. @end example
  5106. @item
  5107. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  5108. screen starting since time 2:
  5109. @example
  5110. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  5111. @end example
  5112. @item
  5113. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  5114. @example
  5115. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  5116. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  5117. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  5118. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  5119. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  5120. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  5121. "
  5122. @end example
  5123. @item
  5124. Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  5125. @example
  5126. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  5127. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  5128. masked.avi
  5129. @end example
  5130. @item
  5131. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  5132. @example
  5133. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  5134. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  5135. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  5136. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  5137. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  5138. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  5139. @end example
  5140. @end itemize
  5141. @section owdenoise
  5142. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  5143. The filter accepts the following options:
  5144. @table @option
  5145. @item depth
  5146. Set depth.
  5147. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  5148. slow down filtering.
  5149. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  5150. @item luma_strength, ls
  5151. Set luma strength.
  5152. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5153. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5154. Set chroma strength.
  5155. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5156. @end table
  5157. @section pad
  5158. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  5159. provided @var{x}, @var{y} coordinates.
  5160. It accepts the following parameters:
  5161. @table @option
  5162. @item width, w
  5163. @item height, h
  5164. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  5165. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  5166. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  5167. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  5168. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  5169. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  5170. @item x
  5171. @item y
  5172. Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
  5173. with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
  5174. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  5175. expression, and vice versa.
  5176. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  5177. @item color
  5178. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  5179. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5180. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  5181. @end table
  5182. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  5183. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  5184. @table @option
  5185. @item in_w
  5186. @item in_h
  5187. The input video width and height.
  5188. @item iw
  5189. @item ih
  5190. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5191. @item out_w
  5192. @item out_h
  5193. The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
  5194. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions.
  5195. @item ow
  5196. @item oh
  5197. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  5198. @item x
  5199. @item y
  5200. The x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  5201. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
  5202. @item a
  5203. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5204. @item sar
  5205. input sample aspect ratio
  5206. @item dar
  5207. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  5208. @item hsub
  5209. @item vsub
  5210. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5211. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5212. @end table
  5213. @subsection Examples
  5214. @itemize
  5215. @item
  5216. Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
  5217. size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  5218. column 0, row 40
  5219. @example
  5220. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  5221. @end example
  5222. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  5223. @example
  5224. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  5225. @end example
  5226. @item
  5227. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  5228. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  5229. @example
  5230. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5231. @end example
  5232. @item
  5233. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  5234. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  5235. the center of the padded area:
  5236. @example
  5237. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5238. @end example
  5239. @item
  5240. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  5241. @example
  5242. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5243. @end example
  5244. @item
  5245. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  5246. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  5247. according to the relation:
  5248. @example
  5249. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  5250. X = output_dar / sar
  5251. @end example
  5252. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  5253. @example
  5254. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5255. @end example
  5256. @item
  5257. Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  5258. corner of the output padded area:
  5259. @example
  5260. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  5261. @end example
  5262. @end itemize
  5263. @section perspective
  5264. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  5265. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5266. @table @option
  5267. @item x0
  5268. @item y0
  5269. @item x1
  5270. @item y1
  5271. @item x2
  5272. @item y2
  5273. @item x3
  5274. @item y3
  5275. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  5276. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  5277. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{source}, then the specified points will be sent
  5278. to the corners of the destination. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{destination},
  5279. then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
  5280. The expressions can use the following variables:
  5281. @table @option
  5282. @item W
  5283. @item H
  5284. the width and height of video frame.
  5285. @end table
  5286. @item interpolation
  5287. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  5288. It accepts the following values:
  5289. @table @samp
  5290. @item linear
  5291. @item cubic
  5292. @end table
  5293. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  5294. @item sense
  5295. Set interpretation of coordinate options.
  5296. It accepts the following values:
  5297. @table @samp
  5298. @item 0, source
  5299. Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
  5300. the corners of the destination.
  5301. @item 1, destination
  5302. Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
  5303. by the given coordinates.
  5304. Default value is @samp{source}.
  5305. @end table
  5306. @end table
  5307. @section phase
  5308. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  5309. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  5310. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  5311. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5312. @table @option
  5313. @item mode
  5314. Set phase mode.
  5315. It accepts the following values:
  5316. @table @samp
  5317. @item t
  5318. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  5319. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  5320. @item b
  5321. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  5322. Filter will delay the top field.
  5323. @item p
  5324. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  5325. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  5326. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  5327. @item a
  5328. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  5329. opposite.
  5330. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  5331. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  5332. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  5333. @item u
  5334. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  5335. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  5336. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  5337. match between the fields.
  5338. @item T
  5339. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5340. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5341. @item B
  5342. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5343. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5344. @item A
  5345. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  5346. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  5347. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  5348. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  5349. @item U
  5350. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  5351. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  5352. @end table
  5353. @end table
  5354. @section pixdesctest
  5355. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  5356. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  5357. For example:
  5358. @example
  5359. format=monow, pixdesctest
  5360. @end example
  5361. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  5362. @section pp
  5363. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  5364. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  5365. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  5366. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  5367. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  5368. The filters accept the following options:
  5369. @table @option
  5370. @item subfilters
  5371. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  5372. @end table
  5373. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  5374. @table @option
  5375. @item a/autoq
  5376. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  5377. @item c/chrom
  5378. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  5379. @item y/nochrom
  5380. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  5381. @item n/noluma
  5382. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  5383. @end table
  5384. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  5385. Available subfilters are:
  5386. @table @option
  5387. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5388. Horizontal deblocking filter
  5389. @table @option
  5390. @item difference
  5391. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5392. @item flatness
  5393. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5394. @end table
  5395. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5396. Vertical deblocking filter
  5397. @table @option
  5398. @item difference
  5399. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5400. @item flatness
  5401. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5402. @end table
  5403. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5404. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  5405. @table @option
  5406. @item difference
  5407. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5408. @item flatness
  5409. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5410. @end table
  5411. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5412. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  5413. @table @option
  5414. @item difference
  5415. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5416. @item flatness
  5417. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5418. @end table
  5419. @end table
  5420. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  5421. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  5422. thresholds.
  5423. @table @option
  5424. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  5425. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  5426. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  5427. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  5428. @item dr/dering
  5429. Deringing filter
  5430. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  5431. @table @option
  5432. @item threshold1
  5433. larger -> stronger filtering
  5434. @item threshold2
  5435. larger -> stronger filtering
  5436. @item threshold3
  5437. larger -> stronger filtering
  5438. @end table
  5439. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  5440. @table @option
  5441. @item f/fullyrange
  5442. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  5443. @end table
  5444. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5445. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5446. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5447. @item li/linipoldeint
  5448. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5449. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5450. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5451. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5452. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5453. @item md/mediandeint
  5454. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5455. median filter to every second line.
  5456. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5457. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5458. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5459. @item l5/lowpass5
  5460. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5461. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5462. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5463. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5464. specify.
  5465. @table @option
  5466. @item quantizer
  5467. Quantizer to use
  5468. @end table
  5469. @item de/default
  5470. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5471. @item fa/fast
  5472. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5473. @item ac
  5474. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5475. @end table
  5476. @subsection Examples
  5477. @itemize
  5478. @item
  5479. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5480. brightness/contrast:
  5481. @example
  5482. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5483. @end example
  5484. @item
  5485. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5486. @example
  5487. pp=de/-al
  5488. @end example
  5489. @item
  5490. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5491. @example
  5492. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5493. @end example
  5494. @item
  5495. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5496. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5497. @example
  5498. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5499. @end example
  5500. @end itemize
  5501. @section psnr
  5502. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5503. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5504. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5505. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5506. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5507. the PSNR.
  5508. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5509. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5510. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5511. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5512. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5513. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5514. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5515. @example
  5516. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5517. @end example
  5518. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5519. image.
  5520. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5521. @table @option
  5522. @item stats_file, f
  5523. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5524. each individual frame.
  5525. @end table
  5526. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5527. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5528. couple of frames.
  5529. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5530. @table @option
  5531. @item n
  5532. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5533. @item mse_avg
  5534. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5535. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5536. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5537. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5538. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5539. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5540. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5541. specified by the suffix.
  5542. @end table
  5543. For example:
  5544. @example
  5545. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5546. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5547. @end example
  5548. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5549. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5550. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5551. @anchor{pullup}
  5552. @section pullup
  5553. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5554. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5555. content.
  5556. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5557. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5558. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5559. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5560. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5561. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5562. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5563. The filter accepts the following options:
  5564. @table @option
  5565. @item jl
  5566. @item jr
  5567. @item jt
  5568. @item jb
  5569. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5570. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5571. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5572. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5573. @item sb
  5574. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5575. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5576. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5577. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5578. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5579. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5580. Default value is @code{0}.
  5581. @item mp
  5582. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5583. @table @samp
  5584. @item l
  5585. Use luma plane.
  5586. @item u
  5587. Use chroma blue plane.
  5588. @item v
  5589. Use chroma red plane.
  5590. @end table
  5591. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5592. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5593. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5594. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5595. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5596. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5597. @end table
  5598. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5599. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5600. telecine NTSC input:
  5601. @example
  5602. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5603. @end example
  5604. @section removelogo
  5605. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5606. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5607. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5608. The filter accepts the following options:
  5609. @table @option
  5610. @item filename, f
  5611. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5612. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5613. video stream being processed.
  5614. @end table
  5615. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5616. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5617. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5618. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5619. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5620. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5621. filter once or twice.
  5622. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5623. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5624. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5625. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5626. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5627. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5628. @section rotate
  5629. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5630. The filter accepts the following options:
  5631. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5632. @table @option
  5633. @item angle, a
  5634. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5635. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5636. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5637. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5638. @item out_w, ow
  5639. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5640. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5641. @item out_h, oh
  5642. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5643. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5644. @item bilinear
  5645. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5646. it. Default value is 1.
  5647. @item fillcolor, c
  5648. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5649. image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5650. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5651. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5652. Default value is "black".
  5653. @end table
  5654. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5655. following constants and functions:
  5656. @table @option
  5657. @item n
  5658. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5659. before the first frame is filtered.
  5660. @item t
  5661. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5662. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5663. @item hsub
  5664. @item vsub
  5665. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5666. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5667. @item in_w, iw
  5668. @item in_h, ih
  5669. the input video width and height
  5670. @item out_w, ow
  5671. @item out_h, oh
  5672. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5673. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5674. @item rotw(a)
  5675. @item roth(a)
  5676. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5677. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5678. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5679. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5680. @end table
  5681. @subsection Examples
  5682. @itemize
  5683. @item
  5684. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5685. @example
  5686. rotate=PI/6
  5687. @end example
  5688. @item
  5689. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5690. @example
  5691. rotate=-PI/6
  5692. @end example
  5693. @item
  5694. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5695. @example
  5696. rotate=45*PI/180
  5697. @end example
  5698. @item
  5699. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5700. @example
  5701. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5702. @end example
  5703. @item
  5704. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5705. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5706. @example
  5707. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  5708. @end example
  5709. @item
  5710. Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
  5711. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  5712. @example
  5713. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  5714. @end example
  5715. @item
  5716. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  5717. shown:
  5718. @example
  5719. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  5720. @end example
  5721. @end itemize
  5722. @subsection Commands
  5723. The filter supports the following commands:
  5724. @table @option
  5725. @item a, angle
  5726. Set the angle expression.
  5727. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5728. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5729. value.
  5730. @end table
  5731. @section sab
  5732. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  5733. The filter accepts the following options:
  5734. @table @option
  5735. @item luma_radius, lr
  5736. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  5737. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  5738. in slower processing.
  5739. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  5740. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  5741. value is 1.0.
  5742. @item luma_strength, ls
  5743. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  5744. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  5745. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5746. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  5747. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  5748. processing.
  5749. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  5750. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  5751. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5752. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  5753. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  5754. @end table
  5755. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  5756. corresponding luma option value.
  5757. @anchor{scale}
  5758. @section scale
  5759. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  5760. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  5761. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  5762. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  5763. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  5764. requested format.
  5765. @subsection Options
  5766. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  5767. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  5768. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  5769. the complete list of scaler options.
  5770. @table @option
  5771. @item width, w
  5772. @item height, h
  5773. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  5774. dimension.
  5775. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  5776. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  5777. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  5778. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  5779. used
  5780. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  5781. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  5782. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  5783. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  5784. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  5785. expression.
  5786. @item interl
  5787. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  5788. @table @samp
  5789. @item 1
  5790. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  5791. @item 0
  5792. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  5793. @item -1
  5794. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  5795. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  5796. @end table
  5797. Default value is @samp{0}.
  5798. @item flags
  5799. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  5800. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  5801. complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
  5802. the default flags.
  5803. @item size, s
  5804. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5805. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5806. @item in_color_matrix
  5807. @item out_color_matrix
  5808. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  5809. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5810. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  5811. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  5812. Possible values:
  5813. @table @samp
  5814. @item auto
  5815. Choose automatically.
  5816. @item bt709
  5817. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  5818. Recommendation BT.709.
  5819. @item fcc
  5820. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  5821. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  5822. @item bt601
  5823. Set color space conforming to:
  5824. @itemize
  5825. @item
  5826. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  5827. @item
  5828. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  5829. @item
  5830. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  5831. @end itemize
  5832. @item smpte240m
  5833. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  5834. @end table
  5835. @item in_range
  5836. @item out_range
  5837. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  5838. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5839. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  5840. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  5841. @table @samp
  5842. @item auto
  5843. Choose automatically.
  5844. @item jpeg/full/pc
  5845. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5846. @item mpeg/tv
  5847. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5848. @end table
  5849. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  5850. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  5851. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  5852. @table @samp
  5853. @item disable
  5854. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  5855. @item decrease
  5856. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  5857. @item increase
  5858. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  5859. @end table
  5860. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  5861. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  5862. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  5863. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  5864. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  5865. 1280x533.
  5866. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  5867. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  5868. to work.
  5869. @end table
  5870. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  5871. containing the following constants:
  5872. @table @var
  5873. @item in_w
  5874. @item in_h
  5875. The input width and height
  5876. @item iw
  5877. @item ih
  5878. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5879. @item out_w
  5880. @item out_h
  5881. The output (scaled) width and height
  5882. @item ow
  5883. @item oh
  5884. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  5885. @item a
  5886. The same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5887. @item sar
  5888. input sample aspect ratio
  5889. @item dar
  5890. The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  5891. @item hsub
  5892. @item vsub
  5893. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5894. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5895. @item ohsub
  5896. @item ovsub
  5897. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5898. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5899. @end table
  5900. @subsection Examples
  5901. @itemize
  5902. @item
  5903. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
  5904. @example
  5905. scale=w=200:h=100
  5906. @end example
  5907. This is equivalent to:
  5908. @example
  5909. scale=200:100
  5910. @end example
  5911. or:
  5912. @example
  5913. scale=200x100
  5914. @end example
  5915. @item
  5916. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  5917. @example
  5918. scale=qcif
  5919. @end example
  5920. which can also be written as:
  5921. @example
  5922. scale=size=qcif
  5923. @end example
  5924. @item
  5925. Scale the input to 2x:
  5926. @example
  5927. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  5928. @end example
  5929. @item
  5930. The above is the same as:
  5931. @example
  5932. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  5933. @end example
  5934. @item
  5935. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  5936. @example
  5937. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  5938. @end example
  5939. @item
  5940. Scale the input to half size:
  5941. @example
  5942. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  5943. @end example
  5944. @item
  5945. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  5946. @example
  5947. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  5948. @end example
  5949. @item
  5950. Seek Greek harmony:
  5951. @example
  5952. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  5953. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  5954. @end example
  5955. @item
  5956. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  5957. @example
  5958. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  5959. @end example
  5960. @item
  5961. Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
  5962. subsample values:
  5963. @example
  5964. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  5965. @end example
  5966. @item
  5967. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
  5968. keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
  5969. @example
  5970. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  5971. @end example
  5972. @end itemize
  5973. @section separatefields
  5974. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  5975. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  5976. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  5977. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  5978. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  5979. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  5980. @section setdar, setsar
  5981. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  5982. output video.
  5983. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  5984. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  5985. @example
  5986. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  5987. @end example
  5988. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  5989. dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
  5990. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  5991. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  5992. applied.
  5993. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  5994. the filter output video.
  5995. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  5996. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  5997. above.
  5998. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  5999. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  6000. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  6001. It accepts the following parameters:
  6002. @table @option
  6003. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  6004. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  6005. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  6006. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  6007. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  6008. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  6009. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  6010. should be escaped.
  6011. @item max
  6012. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  6013. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  6014. Default value is @code{100}.
  6015. @end table
  6016. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  6017. the following constants:
  6018. @table @option
  6019. @item E, PI, PHI
  6020. These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
  6021. (Euler's number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
  6022. @item w, h
  6023. The input width and height.
  6024. @item a
  6025. These are the same as @var{w} / @var{h}.
  6026. @item sar
  6027. The input sample aspect ratio.
  6028. @item dar
  6029. The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
  6030. (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  6031. @item hsub, vsub
  6032. Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  6033. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  6034. @end table
  6035. @subsection Examples
  6036. @itemize
  6037. @item
  6038. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  6039. @example
  6040. setdar=dar=1.77777
  6041. setdar=dar=16/9
  6042. setdar=dar=1.77777
  6043. @end example
  6044. @item
  6045. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  6046. @example
  6047. setsar=sar=10/11
  6048. @end example
  6049. @item
  6050. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  6051. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  6052. @example
  6053. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  6054. @end example
  6055. @end itemize
  6056. @anchor{setfield}
  6057. @section setfield
  6058. Force field for the output video frame.
  6059. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  6060. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  6061. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  6062. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  6063. The filter accepts the following options:
  6064. @table @option
  6065. @item mode
  6066. Available values are:
  6067. @table @samp
  6068. @item auto
  6069. Keep the same field property.
  6070. @item bff
  6071. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  6072. @item tff
  6073. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  6074. @item prog
  6075. Mark the frame as progressive.
  6076. @end table
  6077. @end table
  6078. @section showinfo
  6079. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  6080. The input video is not modified.
  6081. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  6082. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  6083. The following values are shown in the output:
  6084. @table @option
  6085. @item n
  6086. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  6087. @item pts
  6088. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6089. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  6090. @item pts_time
  6091. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6092. seconds.
  6093. @item pos
  6094. The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
  6095. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
  6096. @item fmt
  6097. The pixel format name.
  6098. @item sar
  6099. The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  6100. @var{num}/@var{den}.
  6101. @item s
  6102. The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  6103. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6104. @item i
  6105. The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  6106. for bottom field first).
  6107. @item iskey
  6108. This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
  6109. @item type
  6110. The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  6111. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
  6112. Also refer to the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  6113. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  6114. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  6115. @item checksum
  6116. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
  6117. @item plane_checksum
  6118. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  6119. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]".
  6120. @end table
  6121. @section shuffleplanes
  6122. Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
  6123. It accepts the following parameters:
  6124. @table @option
  6125. @item map0
  6126. The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
  6127. @item map1
  6128. The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
  6129. @item map2
  6130. The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
  6131. @item map3
  6132. The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
  6133. @end table
  6134. The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
  6135. Swap the second and third planes of the input:
  6136. @example
  6137. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
  6138. @end example
  6139. @section signalstats
  6140. Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
  6141. with the digitization of analog video media.
  6142. By default the filter will log these metadata values:
  6143. @table @option
  6144. @item YMIN
  6145. Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6146. range of [0-255].
  6147. @item YLOW
  6148. Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6149. range of [0-255].
  6150. @item YAVG
  6151. Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6152. [0-255].
  6153. @item YHIGH
  6154. Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6155. range of [0-255].
  6156. @item YMAX
  6157. Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6158. range of [0-255].
  6159. @item UMIN
  6160. Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6161. range of [0-255].
  6162. @item ULOW
  6163. Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6164. range of [0-255].
  6165. @item UAVG
  6166. Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6167. [0-255].
  6168. @item UHIGH
  6169. Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6170. range of [0-255].
  6171. @item UMAX
  6172. Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6173. range of [0-255].
  6174. @item VMIN
  6175. Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6176. range of [0-255].
  6177. @item VLOW
  6178. Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6179. range of [0-255].
  6180. @item VAVG
  6181. Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6182. [0-255].
  6183. @item VHIGH
  6184. Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6185. range of [0-255].
  6186. @item VMAX
  6187. Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6188. range of [0-255].
  6189. @item SATMIN
  6190. Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6191. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6192. @item SATLOW
  6193. Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
  6194. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6195. @item SATAVG
  6196. Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
  6197. of [0-~181.02].
  6198. @item SATHIGH
  6199. Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
  6200. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6201. @item SATMAX
  6202. Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6203. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6204. @item HUEMED
  6205. Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6206. [0-360].
  6207. @item HUEAVG
  6208. Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6209. [0-360].
  6210. @item YDIF
  6211. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
  6212. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6213. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6214. @item UDIF
  6215. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
  6216. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6217. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6218. @item VDIF
  6219. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
  6220. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6221. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6222. @end table
  6223. The filter accepts the following options:
  6224. @table @option
  6225. @item stat
  6226. @item out
  6227. @option{stat} specify an additional form of image analysis.
  6228. @option{out} output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
  6229. Both options accept the following values:
  6230. @table @samp
  6231. @item tout
  6232. Identify @var{temporal outliers} pixels. A @var{temporal outlier} is a pixel
  6233. unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
  6234. include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
  6235. @item vrep
  6236. Identify @var{vertical line repetition}. Vertical line repetition includes
  6237. similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
  6238. repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
  6239. analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
  6240. analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
  6241. @item brng
  6242. Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
  6243. @end table
  6244. @item color, c
  6245. Set the highlight color for the @option{out} option. The default color is
  6246. yellow.
  6247. @end table
  6248. @subsection Examples
  6249. @itemize
  6250. @item
  6251. Output data of various video metrics:
  6252. @example
  6253. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames
  6254. @end example
  6255. @item
  6256. Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:
  6257. @example
  6258. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN
  6259. @end example
  6260. @item
  6261. Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.
  6262. @example
  6263. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"
  6264. @end example
  6265. @item
  6266. Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.
  6267. @example
  6268. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt
  6269. @end example
  6270. The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:
  6271. @example
  6272. time %@{pts:hms@}
  6273. Y (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX@})
  6274. U (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX@})
  6275. V (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX@})
  6276. saturation maximum: %@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX@}
  6277. @end example
  6278. @end itemize
  6279. @anchor{smartblur}
  6280. @section smartblur
  6281. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  6282. It accepts the following options:
  6283. @table @option
  6284. @item luma_radius, lr
  6285. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6286. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6287. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6288. @item luma_strength, ls
  6289. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6290. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6291. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6292. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6293. @item luma_threshold, lt
  6294. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6295. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6296. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6297. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6298. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6299. @item chroma_radius, cr
  6300. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6301. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6302. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6303. @item chroma_strength, cs
  6304. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6305. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6306. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6307. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6308. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  6309. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6310. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6311. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6312. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6313. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6314. @end table
  6315. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  6316. is set.
  6317. @section stereo3d
  6318. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  6319. The filters accept the following options:
  6320. @table @option
  6321. @item in
  6322. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  6323. Available values for input image formats are:
  6324. @table @samp
  6325. @item sbsl
  6326. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  6327. @item sbsr
  6328. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  6329. @item sbs2l
  6330. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  6331. (left eye left, right eye right)
  6332. @item sbs2r
  6333. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  6334. (right eye left, left eye right)
  6335. @item abl
  6336. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  6337. @item abr
  6338. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  6339. @item ab2l
  6340. above-below with half height resolution
  6341. (left eye above, right eye below)
  6342. @item ab2r
  6343. above-below with half height resolution
  6344. (right eye above, left eye below)
  6345. @item al
  6346. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  6347. @item ar
  6348. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  6349. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  6350. @end table
  6351. @item out
  6352. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  6353. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  6354. @table @samp
  6355. @item arbg
  6356. anaglyph red/blue gray
  6357. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6358. @item argg
  6359. anaglyph red/green gray
  6360. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  6361. @item arcg
  6362. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  6363. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6364. @item arch
  6365. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  6366. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6367. @item arcc
  6368. anaglyph red/cyan color
  6369. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6370. @item arcd
  6371. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6372. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6373. @item agmg
  6374. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  6375. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6376. @item agmh
  6377. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  6378. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6379. @item agmc
  6380. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  6381. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6382. @item agmd
  6383. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6384. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6385. @item aybg
  6386. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  6387. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6388. @item aybh
  6389. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  6390. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6391. @item aybc
  6392. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  6393. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6394. @item aybd
  6395. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6396. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6397. @item irl
  6398. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  6399. @item irr
  6400. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  6401. @item ml
  6402. mono output (left eye only)
  6403. @item mr
  6404. mono output (right eye only)
  6405. @end table
  6406. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  6407. @end table
  6408. @subsection Examples
  6409. @itemize
  6410. @item
  6411. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  6412. @example
  6413. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  6414. @end example
  6415. @item
  6416. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  6417. @example
  6418. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  6419. @end example
  6420. @end itemize
  6421. @anchor{spp}
  6422. @section spp
  6423. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  6424. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  6425. and average the results.
  6426. The filter accepts the following options:
  6427. @table @option
  6428. @item quality
  6429. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  6430. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  6431. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  6432. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  6433. @code{3}.
  6434. @item qp
  6435. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  6436. from the video stream (if available).
  6437. @item mode
  6438. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  6439. @table @samp
  6440. @item hard
  6441. Set hard thresholding (default).
  6442. @item soft
  6443. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  6444. @end table
  6445. @item use_bframe_qp
  6446. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  6447. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  6448. @code{0} (not enabled).
  6449. @end table
  6450. @anchor{subtitles}
  6451. @section subtitles
  6452. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  6453. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6454. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  6455. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  6456. Alpha) subtitles format.
  6457. The filter accepts the following options:
  6458. @table @option
  6459. @item filename, f
  6460. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  6461. @item original_size
  6462. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  6463. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
  6464. the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
  6465. this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
  6466. changed.
  6467. @item charenc
  6468. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  6469. useful if not UTF-8.
  6470. @item stream_index, si
  6471. Set subtitles stream index. @code{subtitles} filter only.
  6472. @end table
  6473. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  6474. specifies the @option{filename}.
  6475. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  6476. video, use the command:
  6477. @example
  6478. subtitles=sub.srt
  6479. @end example
  6480. which is equivalent to:
  6481. @example
  6482. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  6483. @end example
  6484. To render the default subtitles stream from file @file{video.mkv}, use:
  6485. @example
  6486. subtitles=video.mkv
  6487. @end example
  6488. To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
  6489. @example
  6490. subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
  6491. @end example
  6492. @section super2xsai
  6493. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  6494. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  6495. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  6496. @section swapuv
  6497. Swap U & V plane.
  6498. @section telecine
  6499. Apply telecine process to the video.
  6500. This filter accepts the following options:
  6501. @table @option
  6502. @item first_field
  6503. @table @samp
  6504. @item top, t
  6505. top field first
  6506. @item bottom, b
  6507. bottom field first
  6508. The default value is @code{top}.
  6509. @end table
  6510. @item pattern
  6511. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  6512. The default value is @code{23}.
  6513. @end table
  6514. @example
  6515. Some typical patterns:
  6516. NTSC output (30i):
  6517. 27.5p: 32222
  6518. 24p: 23 (classic)
  6519. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  6520. 20p: 33
  6521. 18p: 334
  6522. 16p: 3444
  6523. PAL output (25i):
  6524. 27.5p: 12222
  6525. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  6526. 16.67p: 33
  6527. 16p: 33333334
  6528. @end example
  6529. @section thumbnail
  6530. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  6531. The filter accepts the following options:
  6532. @table @option
  6533. @item n
  6534. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  6535. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  6536. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  6537. @end table
  6538. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  6539. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  6540. @subsection Examples
  6541. @itemize
  6542. @item
  6543. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  6544. @example
  6545. thumbnail=50
  6546. @end example
  6547. @item
  6548. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6549. @example
  6550. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  6551. @end example
  6552. @end itemize
  6553. @section tile
  6554. Tile several successive frames together.
  6555. The filter accepts the following options:
  6556. @table @option
  6557. @item layout
  6558. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  6559. this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6560. @item nb_frames
  6561. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  6562. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  6563. the area will be used.
  6564. @item margin
  6565. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  6566. @item padding
  6567. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  6568. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  6569. refer to the pad video filter.
  6570. @item color
  6571. Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6572. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  6573. is "black".
  6574. @end table
  6575. @subsection Examples
  6576. @itemize
  6577. @item
  6578. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  6579. @example
  6580. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  6581. @end example
  6582. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  6583. duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
  6584. rate.
  6585. @item
  6586. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  6587. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  6588. mixed flat and named options:
  6589. @example
  6590. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  6591. @end example
  6592. @end itemize
  6593. @section tinterlace
  6594. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  6595. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  6596. considered odd.
  6597. The filter accepts the following options:
  6598. @table @option
  6599. @item mode
  6600. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  6601. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  6602. Available values are:
  6603. @table @samp
  6604. @item merge, 0
  6605. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  6606. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  6607. @example
  6608. ------> time
  6609. Input:
  6610. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6611. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6612. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6613. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6614. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6615. Output:
  6616. 11111 33333
  6617. 22222 44444
  6618. 11111 33333
  6619. 22222 44444
  6620. 11111 33333
  6621. 22222 44444
  6622. 11111 33333
  6623. 22222 44444
  6624. @end example
  6625. @item drop_odd, 1
  6626. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6627. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6628. @example
  6629. ------> time
  6630. Input:
  6631. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6632. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6633. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6634. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6635. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6636. Output:
  6637. 22222 44444
  6638. 22222 44444
  6639. 22222 44444
  6640. 22222 44444
  6641. @end example
  6642. @item drop_even, 2
  6643. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6644. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6645. @example
  6646. ------> time
  6647. Input:
  6648. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6649. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6650. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6651. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6652. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6653. Output:
  6654. 11111 33333
  6655. 11111 33333
  6656. 11111 33333
  6657. 11111 33333
  6658. @end example
  6659. @item pad, 3
  6660. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6661. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6662. @example
  6663. ------> time
  6664. Input:
  6665. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6666. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6667. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6668. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6669. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6670. Output:
  6671. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6672. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6673. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6674. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6675. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6676. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6677. 11111 ..... 33333 .....
  6678. ..... 22222 ..... 44444
  6679. @end example
  6680. @item interleave_top, 4
  6681. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6682. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6683. @example
  6684. ------> time
  6685. Input:
  6686. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6687. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  6688. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  6689. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  6690. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  6691. Output:
  6692. 11111 33333
  6693. 22222 44444
  6694. 11111 33333
  6695. 22222 44444
  6696. @end example
  6697. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  6698. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  6699. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6700. @example
  6701. ------> time
  6702. Input:
  6703. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6704. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  6705. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  6706. 11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
  6707. 11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
  6708. Output:
  6709. 22222 44444
  6710. 11111 33333
  6711. 22222 44444
  6712. 11111 33333
  6713. @end example
  6714. @item interlacex2, 6
  6715. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  6716. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  6717. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  6718. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  6719. field synchronisation.
  6720. @example
  6721. ------> time
  6722. Input:
  6723. Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
  6724. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6725. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6726. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6727. 11111 22222 33333 44444
  6728. Output:
  6729. 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
  6730. 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
  6731. 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
  6732. 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
  6733. @end example
  6734. @end table
  6735. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  6736. compatibility reasons.
  6737. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  6738. @item flags
  6739. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  6740. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  6741. @table @option
  6742. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  6743. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  6744. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  6745. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  6746. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  6747. patterning.
  6748. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  6749. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  6750. @end table
  6751. @end table
  6752. @section transpose
  6753. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  6754. It accepts the following parameters:
  6755. @table @option
  6756. @item dir
  6757. Specify the transposition direction.
  6758. Can assume the following values:
  6759. @table @samp
  6760. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  6761. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  6762. @example
  6763. L.R L.l
  6764. . . -> . .
  6765. l.r R.r
  6766. @end example
  6767. @item 1, 5, clock
  6768. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  6769. @example
  6770. L.R l.L
  6771. . . -> . .
  6772. l.r r.R
  6773. @end example
  6774. @item 2, 6, cclock
  6775. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  6776. @example
  6777. L.R R.r
  6778. . . -> . .
  6779. l.r L.l
  6780. @end example
  6781. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  6782. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  6783. @example
  6784. L.R r.R
  6785. . . -> . .
  6786. l.r l.L
  6787. @end example
  6788. @end table
  6789. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  6790. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  6791. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  6792. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  6793. symbolic constants.
  6794. @item passthrough
  6795. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  6796. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  6797. @table @samp
  6798. @item none
  6799. Always apply transposition.
  6800. @item portrait
  6801. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  6802. @item landscape
  6803. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  6804. @end table
  6805. Default value is @code{none}.
  6806. @end table
  6807. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  6808. layout:
  6809. @example
  6810. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  6811. @end example
  6812. The command above can also be specified as:
  6813. @example
  6814. transpose=1:portrait
  6815. @end example
  6816. @section trim
  6817. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  6818. It accepts the following parameters:
  6819. @table @option
  6820. @item start
  6821. Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  6822. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  6823. @item end
  6824. Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  6825. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  6826. frame in the output.
  6827. @item start_pts
  6828. This is the same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp
  6829. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6830. @item end_pts
  6831. This is the same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp
  6832. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6833. @item duration
  6834. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  6835. @item start_frame
  6836. The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
  6837. @item end_frame
  6838. The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  6839. @end table
  6840. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  6841. duration specifications; see
  6842. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  6843. for the accepted syntax.
  6844. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  6845. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  6846. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  6847. the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
  6848. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  6849. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  6850. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  6851. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  6852. filters.
  6853. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  6854. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  6855. Examples:
  6856. @itemize
  6857. @item
  6858. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  6859. @example
  6860. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  6861. @end example
  6862. @item
  6863. Keep only the first second:
  6864. @example
  6865. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  6866. @end example
  6867. @end itemize
  6868. @anchor{unsharp}
  6869. @section unsharp
  6870. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  6871. It accepts the following parameters:
  6872. @table @option
  6873. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  6874. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  6875. 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6876. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  6877. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  6878. and 63. The default value is 5.
  6879. @item luma_amount, la
  6880. Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6881. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6882. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6883. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6884. Default value is 1.0.
  6885. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  6886. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  6887. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6888. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  6889. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  6890. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6891. @item chroma_amount, ca
  6892. Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6893. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6894. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6895. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6896. Default value is 0.0.
  6897. @item opencl
  6898. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  6899. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  6900. @end table
  6901. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  6902. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  6903. @subsection Examples
  6904. @itemize
  6905. @item
  6906. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  6907. @example
  6908. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  6909. @end example
  6910. @item
  6911. Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  6912. @example
  6913. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  6914. @end example
  6915. @end itemize
  6916. @section uspp
  6917. Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
  6918. the image at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{8} - all)
  6919. shifts and average the results.
  6920. The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
  6921. decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
  6922. DCT similar to MJPEG.
  6923. The filter accepts the following options:
  6924. @table @option
  6925. @item quality
  6926. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  6927. an integer in the range 0-8. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  6928. effect. A value of @code{8} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  6929. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  6930. @code{3}.
  6931. @item qp
  6932. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  6933. from the video stream (if available).
  6934. @end table
  6935. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  6936. @section vidstabdetect
  6937. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  6938. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  6939. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  6940. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  6941. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  6942. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6943. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6944. This filter accepts the following options:
  6945. @table @option
  6946. @item result
  6947. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  6948. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  6949. @item shakiness
  6950. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  6951. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  6952. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  6953. @item accuracy
  6954. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  6955. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  6956. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  6957. @item stepsize
  6958. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  6959. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  6960. @item mincontrast
  6961. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  6962. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  6963. value is 0.3.
  6964. @item tripod
  6965. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  6966. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  6967. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  6968. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  6969. the camera view absolutely still.
  6970. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  6971. @item show
  6972. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  6973. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  6974. visualization.
  6975. @end table
  6976. @subsection Examples
  6977. @itemize
  6978. @item
  6979. Use default values:
  6980. @example
  6981. vidstabdetect
  6982. @end example
  6983. @item
  6984. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  6985. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  6986. @example
  6987. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  6988. @end example
  6989. @item
  6990. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  6991. video:
  6992. @example
  6993. vidstabdetect=show=1
  6994. @end example
  6995. @item
  6996. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  6997. @example
  6998. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  6999. @end example
  7000. @end itemize
  7001. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  7002. @section vidstabtransform
  7003. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  7004. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  7005. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  7006. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  7007. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  7008. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  7009. the @ref{unsharp} filter, see below.
  7010. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  7011. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  7012. @subsection Options
  7013. @table @option
  7014. @item input
  7015. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  7016. @file{transforms.trf}.
  7017. @item smoothing
  7018. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  7019. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  7020. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  7021. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  7022. larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
  7023. the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
  7024. camera is simulated.
  7025. @item optalgo
  7026. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  7027. Accepted values are:
  7028. @table @samp
  7029. @item gauss
  7030. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  7031. @item avg
  7032. averaging on transformations
  7033. @end table
  7034. @item maxshift
  7035. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  7036. meaning no limit.
  7037. @item maxangle
  7038. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  7039. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  7040. @item crop
  7041. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  7042. compensation.
  7043. Available values are:
  7044. @table @samp
  7045. @item keep
  7046. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  7047. @item black
  7048. fill the border black
  7049. @end table
  7050. @item invert
  7051. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  7052. @item relative
  7053. Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
  7054. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  7055. @item zoom
  7056. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  7057. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  7058. zoom).
  7059. @item optzoom
  7060. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  7061. Accepted values are:
  7062. @table @samp
  7063. @item 0
  7064. disabled
  7065. @item 1
  7066. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  7067. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  7068. @item 2
  7069. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  7070. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  7071. @end table
  7072. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  7073. @item zoomspeed
  7074. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  7075. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  7076. 0.25.
  7077. @item interpol
  7078. Specify type of interpolation.
  7079. Available values are:
  7080. @table @samp
  7081. @item no
  7082. no interpolation
  7083. @item linear
  7084. linear only horizontal
  7085. @item bilinear
  7086. linear in both directions (default)
  7087. @item bicubic
  7088. cubic in both directions (slow)
  7089. @end table
  7090. @item tripod
  7091. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  7092. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  7093. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  7094. @item debug
  7095. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  7096. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  7097. value is 0.
  7098. @end table
  7099. @subsection Examples
  7100. @itemize
  7101. @item
  7102. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  7103. @example
  7104. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  7105. @end example
  7106. Note the use of the @ref{unsharp} filter which is always recommended.
  7107. @item
  7108. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  7109. @example
  7110. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  7111. @end example
  7112. @item
  7113. Smoothen the video even more:
  7114. @example
  7115. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  7116. @end example
  7117. @end itemize
  7118. @section vflip
  7119. Flip the input video vertically.
  7120. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7121. @example
  7122. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  7123. @end example
  7124. @anchor{vignette}
  7125. @section vignette
  7126. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  7127. The filter accepts the following options:
  7128. @table @option
  7129. @item angle, a
  7130. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  7131. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  7132. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  7133. @item x0
  7134. @item y0
  7135. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  7136. by default.
  7137. @item mode
  7138. Set forward/backward mode.
  7139. Available modes are:
  7140. @table @samp
  7141. @item forward
  7142. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  7143. @item backward
  7144. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  7145. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  7146. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  7147. also be used to create a burning effect.
  7148. @end table
  7149. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  7150. @item eval
  7151. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  7152. It accepts the following values:
  7153. @table @samp
  7154. @item init
  7155. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  7156. @item frame
  7157. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  7158. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  7159. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  7160. @end table
  7161. Default value is @samp{init}.
  7162. @item dither
  7163. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  7164. (enabled).
  7165. @item aspect
  7166. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  7167. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  7168. following the dimensions of the video.
  7169. Default is @code{1/1}.
  7170. @end table
  7171. @subsection Expressions
  7172. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  7173. following parameters.
  7174. @table @option
  7175. @item w
  7176. @item h
  7177. input width and height
  7178. @item n
  7179. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  7180. @item pts
  7181. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  7182. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  7183. @item r
  7184. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  7185. @item t
  7186. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7187. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  7188. @item tb
  7189. time base of the input video
  7190. @end table
  7191. @subsection Examples
  7192. @itemize
  7193. @item
  7194. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  7195. @example
  7196. vignette=PI/4
  7197. @end example
  7198. @item
  7199. Make a flickering vignetting:
  7200. @example
  7201. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  7202. @end example
  7203. @end itemize
  7204. @section w3fdif
  7205. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  7206. Deinterlacing Filter").
  7207. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  7208. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  7209. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  7210. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  7211. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  7212. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  7213. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  7214. @table @option
  7215. @item filter
  7216. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  7217. @table @samp
  7218. @item simple
  7219. Simple filter coefficient set.
  7220. @item complex
  7221. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  7222. @end table
  7223. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  7224. @item deint
  7225. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  7226. @table @samp
  7227. @item all
  7228. Deinterlace all frames,
  7229. @item interlaced
  7230. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7231. @end table
  7232. Default value is @samp{all}.
  7233. @end table
  7234. @section xbr
  7235. Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
  7236. art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
  7237. @url{http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134}.
  7238. It accepts the following option:
  7239. @table @option
  7240. @item n
  7241. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{2xBR}, @code{3} for
  7242. @code{3xBR} and @code{4} for @code{4xBR}.
  7243. Default is @code{3}.
  7244. @end table
  7245. @anchor{yadif}
  7246. @section yadif
  7247. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  7248. filter").
  7249. It accepts the following parameters:
  7250. @table @option
  7251. @item mode
  7252. The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
  7253. @table @option
  7254. @item 0, send_frame
  7255. Output one frame for each frame.
  7256. @item 1, send_field
  7257. Output one frame for each field.
  7258. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  7259. Like @code{send_frame}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7260. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  7261. Like @code{send_field}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7262. @end table
  7263. The default value is @code{send_frame}.
  7264. @item parity
  7265. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
  7266. of the following values:
  7267. @table @option
  7268. @item 0, tff
  7269. Assume the top field is first.
  7270. @item 1, bff
  7271. Assume the bottom field is first.
  7272. @item -1, auto
  7273. Enable automatic detection of field parity.
  7274. @end table
  7275. The default value is @code{auto}.
  7276. If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
  7277. top field first will be assumed.
  7278. @item deint
  7279. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  7280. values:
  7281. @table @option
  7282. @item 0, all
  7283. Deinterlace all frames.
  7284. @item 1, interlaced
  7285. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7286. @end table
  7287. The default value is @code{all}.
  7288. @end table
  7289. @section zoompan
  7290. Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
  7291. This filter accepts the following options:
  7292. @table @option
  7293. @item zoom, z
  7294. Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
  7295. @item x
  7296. @item y
  7297. Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
  7298. @item d
  7299. Set the duration expression in number of frames.
  7300. This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
  7301. single input image.
  7302. @item s
  7303. Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.
  7304. @end table
  7305. Each expression can contain the following constants:
  7306. @table @option
  7307. @item in_w, iw
  7308. Input width.
  7309. @item in_h, ih
  7310. Input height.
  7311. @item out_w, ow
  7312. Output width.
  7313. @item out_h, oh
  7314. Output height.
  7315. @item in
  7316. Input frame count.
  7317. @item on
  7318. Output frame count.
  7319. @item x
  7320. @item y
  7321. Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
  7322. for current input frame.
  7323. @item px
  7324. @item py
  7325. 'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
  7326. not yet such frame (first input frame).
  7327. @item zoom
  7328. Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.
  7329. @item pzoom
  7330. Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
  7331. @item duration
  7332. Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
  7333. for each input frame.
  7334. @item pduration
  7335. number of output frames created for previous input frame
  7336. @item a
  7337. Rational number: input width / input height
  7338. @item sar
  7339. sample aspect ratio
  7340. @item dar
  7341. display aspect ratio
  7342. @end table
  7343. @subsection Examples
  7344. @itemize
  7345. @item
  7346. Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
  7347. @example
  7348. zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
  7349. @end example
  7350. @end itemize
  7351. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  7352. @chapter Video Sources
  7353. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  7354. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  7355. @section buffer
  7356. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  7357. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  7358. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  7359. It accepts the following parameters:
  7360. @table @option
  7361. @item video_size
  7362. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  7363. syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
  7364. manual.
  7365. @item width
  7366. The input video width.
  7367. @item height
  7368. The input video height.
  7369. @item pix_fmt
  7370. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  7371. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  7372. name.
  7373. @item time_base
  7374. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  7375. @item frame_rate
  7376. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  7377. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  7378. The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
  7379. @item sws_param
  7380. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  7381. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  7382. input size or format.
  7383. @end table
  7384. For example:
  7385. @example
  7386. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  7387. @end example
  7388. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  7389. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  7390. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  7391. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  7392. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  7393. this example corresponds to:
  7394. @example
  7395. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  7396. @end example
  7397. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  7398. syntax is deprecated:
  7399. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  7400. @section cellauto
  7401. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  7402. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  7403. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  7404. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  7405. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  7406. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  7407. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  7408. This source accepts the following options:
  7409. @table @option
  7410. @item filename, f
  7411. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7412. the specified file.
  7413. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  7414. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7415. file will be ignored.
  7416. @item pattern, p
  7417. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7418. the specified string.
  7419. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  7420. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7421. string will be ignored.
  7422. @item rate, r
  7423. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7424. Default is 25.
  7425. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7426. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  7427. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  7428. 1/PHI.
  7429. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  7430. @item random_seed, seed
  7431. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  7432. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7433. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7434. effort basis.
  7435. @item rule
  7436. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  7437. Default value is 110.
  7438. @item size, s
  7439. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
  7440. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7441. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  7442. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  7443. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  7444. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  7445. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  7446. larger row.
  7447. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  7448. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  7449. @item scroll
  7450. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  7451. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  7452. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  7453. Defaults to 1.
  7454. @item start_full, full
  7455. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  7456. outputting the first frame.
  7457. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7458. @item stitch
  7459. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  7460. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7461. @end table
  7462. @subsection Examples
  7463. @itemize
  7464. @item
  7465. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  7466. size 200x400.
  7467. @example
  7468. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  7469. @end example
  7470. @item
  7471. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  7472. ratio of 2/3:
  7473. @example
  7474. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7475. @end example
  7476. @item
  7477. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  7478. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  7479. @example
  7480. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7481. @end example
  7482. @item
  7483. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  7484. @example
  7485. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7486. @end example
  7487. @end itemize
  7488. @section mandelbrot
  7489. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  7490. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  7491. This source accepts the following options:
  7492. @table @option
  7493. @item end_pts
  7494. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  7495. @item end_scale
  7496. Set the terminal scale value.
  7497. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  7498. @item inner
  7499. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  7500. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  7501. It shall assume one of the following values:
  7502. @table @option
  7503. @item black
  7504. Set black mode.
  7505. @item convergence
  7506. Show time until convergence.
  7507. @item mincol
  7508. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  7509. @item period
  7510. Set period mode.
  7511. @end table
  7512. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  7513. @item bailout
  7514. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  7515. @item maxiter
  7516. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  7517. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  7518. @item outer
  7519. Set outer coloring mode.
  7520. It shall assume one of following values:
  7521. @table @option
  7522. @item iteration_count
  7523. Set iteration cound mode.
  7524. @item normalized_iteration_count
  7525. set normalized iteration count mode.
  7526. @end table
  7527. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  7528. @item rate, r
  7529. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  7530. value is "25".
  7531. @item size, s
  7532. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  7533. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  7534. @item start_scale
  7535. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  7536. @item start_x
  7537. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  7538. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  7539. @item start_y
  7540. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  7541. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  7542. @end table
  7543. @section mptestsrc
  7544. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  7545. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  7546. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  7547. This source accepts the following options:
  7548. @table @option
  7549. @item rate, r
  7550. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7551. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7552. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7553. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7554. "25".
  7555. @item duration, d
  7556. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7557. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7558. for the accepted syntax.
  7559. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7560. supposed to be generated forever.
  7561. @item test, t
  7562. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  7563. @table @option
  7564. @item dc_luma
  7565. @item dc_chroma
  7566. @item freq_luma
  7567. @item freq_chroma
  7568. @item amp_luma
  7569. @item amp_chroma
  7570. @item cbp
  7571. @item mv
  7572. @item ring1
  7573. @item ring2
  7574. @item all
  7575. @end table
  7576. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  7577. @end table
  7578. Some examples:
  7579. @example
  7580. mptestsrc=t=dc_luma
  7581. @end example
  7582. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  7583. @section frei0r_src
  7584. Provide a frei0r source.
  7585. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  7586. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  7587. This source accepts the following parameters:
  7588. @table @option
  7589. @item size
  7590. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7591. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7592. @item framerate
  7593. The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
  7594. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  7595. @item filter_name
  7596. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  7597. how to set the parameters, read the @ref{frei0r} section in the video filters
  7598. documentation.
  7599. @item filter_params
  7600. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  7601. @end table
  7602. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  7603. and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
  7604. @example
  7605. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  7606. @end example
  7607. @section life
  7608. Generate a life pattern.
  7609. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  7610. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  7611. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  7612. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  7613. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  7614. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  7615. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  7616. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows one to specify
  7617. the rule to adopt.
  7618. This source accepts the following options:
  7619. @table @option
  7620. @item filename, f
  7621. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  7622. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  7623. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  7624. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  7625. randomly.
  7626. @item rate, r
  7627. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7628. Default is 25.
  7629. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7630. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  7631. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  7632. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  7633. @item random_seed, seed
  7634. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  7635. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7636. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7637. effort basis.
  7638. @item rule
  7639. Set the life rule.
  7640. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  7641. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  7642. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  7643. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  7644. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  7645. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  7646. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  7647. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  7648. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  7649. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  7650. higher number of neighbor cells.
  7651. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  7652. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  7653. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  7654. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  7655. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  7656. a dead cell.
  7657. @item size, s
  7658. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7659. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7660. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  7661. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  7662. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  7663. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  7664. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  7665. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  7666. @item stitch
  7667. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  7668. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  7669. @item mold
  7670. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  7671. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  7672. value from 0 to 255.
  7673. @item life_color
  7674. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  7675. @item death_color
  7676. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  7677. used to represent a dead cell.
  7678. @item mold_color
  7679. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  7680. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  7681. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7682. @end table
  7683. @subsection Examples
  7684. @itemize
  7685. @item
  7686. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  7687. 300x300 pixels:
  7688. @example
  7689. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  7690. @end example
  7691. @item
  7692. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  7693. @example
  7694. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7695. @end example
  7696. @item
  7697. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  7698. @example
  7699. life=rule=S14/B34
  7700. @end example
  7701. @item
  7702. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  7703. @example
  7704. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  7705. @end example
  7706. @end itemize
  7707. @anchor{color}
  7708. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  7709. @anchor{nullsrc}
  7710. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  7711. @anchor{smptebars}
  7712. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  7713. @anchor{testsrc}
  7714. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  7715. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  7716. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  7717. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  7718. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  7719. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  7720. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  7721. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  7722. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  7723. stripe from top to bottom.
  7724. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7725. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  7726. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7727. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  7728. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  7729. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  7730. intended for testing purposes.
  7731. The sources accept the following parameters:
  7732. @table @option
  7733. @item color, c
  7734. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  7735. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  7736. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7737. @item level
  7738. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  7739. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  7740. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  7741. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  7742. @item size, s
  7743. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7744. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
  7745. "320x240".
  7746. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  7747. @item rate, r
  7748. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7749. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7750. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7751. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7752. "25".
  7753. @item sar
  7754. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  7755. @item duration, d
  7756. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7757. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7758. for the accepted syntax.
  7759. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7760. supposed to be generated forever.
  7761. @item decimals, n
  7762. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  7763. @code{testsrc} source.
  7764. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  7765. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  7766. value. Default value is 0.
  7767. @end table
  7768. For example the following:
  7769. @example
  7770. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  7771. @end example
  7772. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  7773. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  7774. The following graph description will generate a red source
  7775. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  7776. frames per second.
  7777. @example
  7778. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  7779. @end example
  7780. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  7781. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  7782. the @code{geq} filter:
  7783. @example
  7784. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  7785. @end example
  7786. @subsection Commands
  7787. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  7788. @table @option
  7789. @item c, color
  7790. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  7791. corresponding @option{color} option.
  7792. @end table
  7793. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  7794. @chapter Video Sinks
  7795. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  7796. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  7797. @section buffersink
  7798. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  7799. graph.
  7800. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  7801. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  7802. or the options system.
  7803. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  7804. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  7805. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  7806. @section nullsink
  7807. Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  7808. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  7809. tools.
  7810. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  7811. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  7812. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7813. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  7814. @section avectorscope
  7815. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  7816. scope.
  7817. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  7818. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  7819. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  7820. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  7821. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  7822. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  7823. The filter accepts the following options:
  7824. @table @option
  7825. @item mode, m
  7826. Set the vectorscope mode.
  7827. Available values are:
  7828. @table @samp
  7829. @item lissajous
  7830. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  7831. @item lissajous_xy
  7832. Same as above but not rotated.
  7833. @end table
  7834. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  7835. @item size, s
  7836. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  7837. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  7838. @item rate, r
  7839. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  7840. @item rc
  7841. @item gc
  7842. @item bc
  7843. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  7844. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7845. @item rf
  7846. @item gf
  7847. @item bf
  7848. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  7849. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7850. @item zoom
  7851. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  7852. @end table
  7853. @subsection Examples
  7854. @itemize
  7855. @item
  7856. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  7857. @example
  7858. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7859. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  7860. @end example
  7861. @end itemize
  7862. @section concat
  7863. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  7864. other.
  7865. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  7866. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  7867. also be the number of streams at output.
  7868. The filter accepts the following options:
  7869. @table @option
  7870. @item n
  7871. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  7872. @item v
  7873. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  7874. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  7875. @item a
  7876. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
  7877. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  7878. @item unsafe
  7879. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  7880. @end table
  7881. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  7882. @var{a} audio outputs.
  7883. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  7884. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  7885. segment, etc.
  7886. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  7887. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  7888. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  7889. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  7890. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  7891. audio streams with silence.
  7892. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  7893. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  7894. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  7895. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  7896. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  7897. explicitly by the user.
  7898. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  7899. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  7900. @subsection Examples
  7901. @itemize
  7902. @item
  7903. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  7904. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  7905. @example
  7906. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  7907. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  7908. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  7909. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  7910. @end example
  7911. @item
  7912. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  7913. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  7914. @example
  7915. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  7916. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  7917. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  7918. @end example
  7919. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  7920. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  7921. @end itemize
  7922. @section ebur128
  7923. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  7924. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  7925. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  7926. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  7927. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  7928. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  7929. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  7930. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  7931. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  7932. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  7933. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  7934. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  7935. The filter accepts the following options:
  7936. @table @option
  7937. @item video
  7938. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  7939. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  7940. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  7941. @item size
  7942. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  7943. option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
  7944. and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  7945. @item meter
  7946. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  7947. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  7948. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  7949. @item metadata
  7950. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  7951. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  7952. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  7953. Default is @code{0}.
  7954. @item framelog
  7955. Force the frame logging level.
  7956. Available values are:
  7957. @table @samp
  7958. @item info
  7959. information logging level
  7960. @item verbose
  7961. verbose logging level
  7962. @end table
  7963. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  7964. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  7965. @item peak
  7966. Set peak mode(s).
  7967. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  7968. values are:
  7969. @table @samp
  7970. @item none
  7971. Disable any peak mode (default).
  7972. @item sample
  7973. Enable sample-peak mode.
  7974. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  7975. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  7976. @item true
  7977. Enable true-peak mode.
  7978. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  7979. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  7980. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  7981. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  7982. @end table
  7983. @end table
  7984. @subsection Examples
  7985. @itemize
  7986. @item
  7987. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  7988. @example
  7989. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  7990. @end example
  7991. @item
  7992. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7993. @example
  7994. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  7995. @end example
  7996. @end itemize
  7997. @section interleave, ainterleave
  7998. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  7999. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  8000. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  8001. queued frame to the output.
  8002. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  8003. timestamp values.
  8004. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  8005. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  8006. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  8007. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  8008. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  8009. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  8010. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  8011. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  8012. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  8013. the queue is already filled.
  8014. These filters accept the following options:
  8015. @table @option
  8016. @item nb_inputs, n
  8017. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  8018. @end table
  8019. @subsection Examples
  8020. @itemize
  8021. @item
  8022. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  8023. @example
  8024. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  8025. @end example
  8026. @item
  8027. Add flickering blur effect:
  8028. @example
  8029. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  8030. @end example
  8031. @end itemize
  8032. @section perms, aperms
  8033. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  8034. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  8035. following filter in the filtergraph.
  8036. The filters accept the following options:
  8037. @table @option
  8038. @item mode
  8039. Select the permissions mode.
  8040. It accepts the following values:
  8041. @table @samp
  8042. @item none
  8043. Do nothing. This is the default.
  8044. @item ro
  8045. Set all the output frames read-only.
  8046. @item rw
  8047. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  8048. @item toggle
  8049. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  8050. @item random
  8051. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  8052. @end table
  8053. @item seed
  8054. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  8055. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  8056. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  8057. basis.
  8058. @end table
  8059. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  8060. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  8061. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  8062. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  8063. @section select, aselect
  8064. Select frames to pass in output.
  8065. This filter accepts the following options:
  8066. @table @option
  8067. @item expr, e
  8068. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  8069. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  8070. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  8071. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  8072. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  8073. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  8074. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  8075. @item outputs, n
  8076. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  8077. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  8078. @end table
  8079. The expression can contain the following constants:
  8080. @table @option
  8081. @item n
  8082. The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
  8083. @item selected_n
  8084. The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
  8085. @item prev_selected_n
  8086. The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8087. @item TB
  8088. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8089. @item pts
  8090. The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  8091. expressed in @var{TB} units. It's NAN if undefined.
  8092. @item t
  8093. The PTS of the filtered video frame,
  8094. expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.
  8095. @item prev_pts
  8096. The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8097. @item prev_selected_pts
  8098. The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8099. @item prev_selected_t
  8100. The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  8101. @item start_pts
  8102. The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  8103. @item start_t
  8104. The time of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  8105. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  8106. The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
  8107. values:
  8108. @table @option
  8109. @item I
  8110. @item P
  8111. @item B
  8112. @item S
  8113. @item SI
  8114. @item SP
  8115. @item BI
  8116. @end table
  8117. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  8118. The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
  8119. @table @option
  8120. @item PROGRESSIVE
  8121. The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
  8122. @item TOPFIRST
  8123. The frame is top-field-first.
  8124. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  8125. The frame is bottom-field-first.
  8126. @end table
  8127. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  8128. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  8129. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  8130. the number of samples in the current frame
  8131. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  8132. the input sample rate
  8133. @item key
  8134. This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
  8135. @item pos
  8136. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  8137. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  8138. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  8139. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  8140. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  8141. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  8142. @end table
  8143. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  8144. @subsection Examples
  8145. @itemize
  8146. @item
  8147. Select all frames in input:
  8148. @example
  8149. select
  8150. @end example
  8151. The example above is the same as:
  8152. @example
  8153. select=1
  8154. @end example
  8155. @item
  8156. Skip all frames:
  8157. @example
  8158. select=0
  8159. @end example
  8160. @item
  8161. Select only I-frames:
  8162. @example
  8163. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  8164. @end example
  8165. @item
  8166. Select one frame every 100:
  8167. @example
  8168. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  8169. @end example
  8170. @item
  8171. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  8172. @example
  8173. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  8174. @end example
  8175. @item
  8176. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  8177. @example
  8178. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  8179. @end example
  8180. @item
  8181. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  8182. @example
  8183. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  8184. @end example
  8185. @item
  8186. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  8187. @example
  8188. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  8189. @end example
  8190. @item
  8191. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  8192. @example
  8193. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  8194. @end example
  8195. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  8196. choice.
  8197. @item
  8198. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  8199. @example
  8200. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  8201. @end example
  8202. @end itemize
  8203. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  8204. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  8205. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  8206. filtergraph.
  8207. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  8208. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  8209. from that they act the same way.
  8210. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  8211. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  8212. @var{filename} option.
  8213. These filters accept the following options:
  8214. @table @option
  8215. @item commands, c
  8216. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  8217. @item filename, f
  8218. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  8219. filters.
  8220. @end table
  8221. @subsection Commands syntax
  8222. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  8223. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  8224. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  8225. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  8226. interval.
  8227. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  8228. @example
  8229. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  8230. @end example
  8231. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  8232. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  8233. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  8234. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  8235. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  8236. @var{END}.
  8237. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  8238. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  8239. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  8240. @example
  8241. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  8242. @end example
  8243. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  8244. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  8245. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  8246. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  8247. The following flags are recognized:
  8248. @table @option
  8249. @item enter
  8250. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  8251. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8252. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  8253. current is.
  8254. @item leave
  8255. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  8256. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8257. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  8258. current is not.
  8259. @end table
  8260. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  8261. assumed.
  8262. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8263. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8264. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8265. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  8266. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  8267. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  8268. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  8269. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  8270. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  8271. follows:
  8272. @example
  8273. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  8274. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  8275. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8276. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  8277. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  8278. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  8279. @end example
  8280. @subsection Examples
  8281. @itemize
  8282. @item
  8283. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  8284. @example
  8285. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  8286. @end example
  8287. @item
  8288. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  8289. @example
  8290. # show text in the interval 5-10
  8291. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  8292. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  8293. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  8294. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  8295. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  8296. [leave] hue s 1,
  8297. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  8298. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  8299. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  8300. @end example
  8301. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  8302. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  8303. @example
  8304. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  8305. @end example
  8306. @end itemize
  8307. @anchor{setpts}
  8308. @section setpts, asetpts
  8309. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  8310. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  8311. This filter accepts the following options:
  8312. @table @option
  8313. @item expr
  8314. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  8315. @end table
  8316. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  8317. constants:
  8318. @table @option
  8319. @item FRAME_RATE
  8320. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  8321. @item PTS
  8322. The presentation timestamp in input
  8323. @item N
  8324. The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  8325. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  8326. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  8327. The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  8328. audio)
  8329. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  8330. The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  8331. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  8332. The audio sample rate.
  8333. @item STARTPTS
  8334. The PTS of the first frame.
  8335. @item STARTT
  8336. the time in seconds of the first frame
  8337. @item INTERLACED
  8338. State whether the current frame is interlaced.
  8339. @item T
  8340. the time in seconds of the current frame
  8341. @item POS
  8342. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  8343. for the current frame
  8344. @item PREV_INPTS
  8345. The previous input PTS.
  8346. @item PREV_INT
  8347. previous input time in seconds
  8348. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  8349. The previous output PTS.
  8350. @item PREV_OUTT
  8351. previous output time in seconds
  8352. @item RTCTIME
  8353. The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  8354. instead.
  8355. @item RTCSTART
  8356. The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
  8357. @item TB
  8358. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8359. @end table
  8360. @subsection Examples
  8361. @itemize
  8362. @item
  8363. Start counting PTS from zero
  8364. @example
  8365. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  8366. @end example
  8367. @item
  8368. Apply fast motion effect:
  8369. @example
  8370. setpts=0.5*PTS
  8371. @end example
  8372. @item
  8373. Apply slow motion effect:
  8374. @example
  8375. setpts=2.0*PTS
  8376. @end example
  8377. @item
  8378. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  8379. @example
  8380. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  8381. @end example
  8382. @item
  8383. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  8384. @example
  8385. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  8386. @end example
  8387. @item
  8388. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  8389. @example
  8390. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  8391. @end example
  8392. @item
  8393. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  8394. @example
  8395. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  8396. @end example
  8397. @item
  8398. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  8399. @example
  8400. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  8401. @end example
  8402. @end itemize
  8403. @section settb, asettb
  8404. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  8405. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  8406. It accepts the following parameters:
  8407. @table @option
  8408. @item expr, tb
  8409. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  8410. @end table
  8411. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  8412. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  8413. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  8414. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  8415. @subsection Examples
  8416. @itemize
  8417. @item
  8418. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  8419. @example
  8420. settb=expr=1/25
  8421. @end example
  8422. @item
  8423. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  8424. @example
  8425. settb=expr=0.1
  8426. @end example
  8427. @item
  8428. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  8429. @example
  8430. settb=1+0.001
  8431. @end example
  8432. @item
  8433. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  8434. @example
  8435. settb=2*intb
  8436. @end example
  8437. @item
  8438. Set the default timebase value:
  8439. @example
  8440. settb=AVTB
  8441. @end example
  8442. @end itemize
  8443. @section showcqt
  8444. Convert input audio to a video output representing
  8445. frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
  8446. Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
  8447. The filter accepts the following options:
  8448. @table @option
  8449. @item volume
  8450. Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
  8451. variables:
  8452. @table @option
  8453. @item frequency, freq, f
  8454. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8455. @item timeclamp, tc
  8456. value of timeclamp option
  8457. @end table
  8458. and functions:
  8459. @table @option
  8460. @item a_weighting(f)
  8461. A-weighting of equal loudness
  8462. @item b_weighting(f)
  8463. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8464. @item c_weighting(f)
  8465. C-weighting of equal loudness
  8466. @end table
  8467. Default value is @code{16}.
  8468. @item tlength
  8469. Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
  8470. @table @option
  8471. @item frequency, freq, f
  8472. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8473. @item timeclamp, tc
  8474. value of timeclamp option
  8475. @end table
  8476. Default value is @code{384/f*tc/(384/f+tc)}.
  8477. @item timeclamp
  8478. Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
  8479. accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
  8480. event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
  8481. otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
  8482. (such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is @code{0.17}.
  8483. @item coeffclamp
  8484. Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
  8485. more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
  8486. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  8487. @item gamma
  8488. Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
  8489. makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  8490. Default value is @code{3.0}.
  8491. @item fontfile
  8492. Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
  8493. @item fontcolor
  8494. Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
  8495. integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
  8496. @table @option
  8497. @item frequency, freq, f
  8498. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8499. @item timeclamp, tc
  8500. value of timeclamp option
  8501. @end table
  8502. and functions:
  8503. @table @option
  8504. @item midi(f)
  8505. midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
  8506. @item r(x), g(x), b(x)
  8507. red, green, and blue value of intensity x
  8508. @end table
  8509. Default value is @code{st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
  8510. st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
  8511. r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))}
  8512. @item fullhd
  8513. If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
  8514. if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
  8515. @item fps
  8516. Specify video fps. Default value is @code{25}.
  8517. @item count
  8518. Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
  8519. per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
  8520. Default value is @code{6}.
  8521. @end table
  8522. @subsection Examples
  8523. @itemize
  8524. @item
  8525. Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
  8526. @example
  8527. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8528. @end example
  8529. @item
  8530. Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
  8531. @example
  8532. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
  8533. @end example
  8534. @item
  8535. Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
  8536. @example
  8537. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
  8538. @end example
  8539. @item
  8540. A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
  8541. @example
  8542. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8543. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8544. @end example
  8545. @item
  8546. Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
  8547. @example
  8548. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8549. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
  8550. @end example
  8551. @item
  8552. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8553. @example
  8554. volume=16*b_weighting(f)
  8555. @end example
  8556. @item
  8557. Lower Q factor
  8558. @example
  8559. tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
  8560. @end example
  8561. @item
  8562. Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
  8563. @example
  8564. fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
  8565. @end example
  8566. @end itemize
  8567. @section showspectrum
  8568. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  8569. spectrum.
  8570. The filter accepts the following options:
  8571. @table @option
  8572. @item size, s
  8573. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8574. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
  8575. @code{640x512}.
  8576. @item slide
  8577. Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
  8578. It accepts the following values:
  8579. @table @samp
  8580. @item replace
  8581. the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
  8582. @item scroll
  8583. the samples scroll from right to left
  8584. @item fullframe
  8585. frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
  8586. @end table
  8587. Default value is @code{replace}.
  8588. @item mode
  8589. Specify display mode.
  8590. It accepts the following values:
  8591. @table @samp
  8592. @item combined
  8593. all channels are displayed in the same row
  8594. @item separate
  8595. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  8596. @end table
  8597. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  8598. @item color
  8599. Specify display color mode.
  8600. It accepts the following values:
  8601. @table @samp
  8602. @item channel
  8603. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  8604. @item intensity
  8605. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  8606. @end table
  8607. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  8608. @item scale
  8609. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  8610. It accepts the following values:
  8611. @table @samp
  8612. @item lin
  8613. linear
  8614. @item sqrt
  8615. square root, default
  8616. @item cbrt
  8617. cubic root
  8618. @item log
  8619. logarithmic
  8620. @end table
  8621. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  8622. @item saturation
  8623. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  8624. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  8625. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  8626. Default value is @code{1}.
  8627. @item win_func
  8628. Set window function.
  8629. It accepts the following values:
  8630. @table @samp
  8631. @item none
  8632. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  8633. @item hann
  8634. Hann window
  8635. @item hamming
  8636. Hamming window
  8637. @item blackman
  8638. Blackman window
  8639. @end table
  8640. Default value is @code{hann}.
  8641. @end table
  8642. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  8643. section.
  8644. @subsection Examples
  8645. @itemize
  8646. @item
  8647. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  8648. @example
  8649. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  8650. @end example
  8651. @item
  8652. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  8653. @example
  8654. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  8655. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  8656. @end example
  8657. @end itemize
  8658. @section showwaves
  8659. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  8660. The filter accepts the following options:
  8661. @table @option
  8662. @item size, s
  8663. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8664. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
  8665. is "600x240".
  8666. @item mode
  8667. Set display mode.
  8668. Available values are:
  8669. @table @samp
  8670. @item point
  8671. Draw a point for each sample.
  8672. @item line
  8673. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  8674. @item p2p
  8675. Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
  8676. @item cline
  8677. Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
  8678. @end table
  8679. Default value is @code{point}.
  8680. @item n
  8681. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  8682. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  8683. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  8684. is not explicitly specified.
  8685. @item rate, r
  8686. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  8687. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  8688. @item split_channels
  8689. Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
  8690. @end table
  8691. @subsection Examples
  8692. @itemize
  8693. @item
  8694. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  8695. at the same time:
  8696. @example
  8697. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  8698. @end example
  8699. @item
  8700. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  8701. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  8702. @example
  8703. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  8704. @end example
  8705. @end itemize
  8706. @section split, asplit
  8707. Split input into several identical outputs.
  8708. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  8709. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  8710. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  8711. @subsection Examples
  8712. @itemize
  8713. @item
  8714. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  8715. @example
  8716. [in] split [out0][out1]
  8717. @end example
  8718. @item
  8719. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  8720. outputs, like in:
  8721. @example
  8722. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  8723. @end example
  8724. @item
  8725. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  8726. one padded:
  8727. @example
  8728. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  8729. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  8730. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  8731. @end example
  8732. @item
  8733. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  8734. @example
  8735. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  8736. @end example
  8737. @end itemize
  8738. @section zmq, azmq
  8739. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  8740. filters in the filtergraph.
  8741. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  8742. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  8743. audio filters.
  8744. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  8745. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  8746. For more information about libzmq see:
  8747. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  8748. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  8749. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  8750. @option{bind_address} option.
  8751. The received message must be in the form:
  8752. @example
  8753. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8754. @end example
  8755. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8756. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8757. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8758. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  8759. given @var{COMMAND}.
  8760. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  8761. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  8762. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  8763. @example
  8764. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  8765. @var{MESSAGE}
  8766. @end example
  8767. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  8768. @subsection Examples
  8769. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  8770. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  8771. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  8772. @example
  8773. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  8774. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  8775. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  8776. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  8777. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  8778. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  8779. @end example
  8780. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  8781. command can be used:
  8782. @example
  8783. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  8784. @end example
  8785. To change the right side:
  8786. @example
  8787. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  8788. @end example
  8789. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  8790. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  8791. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  8792. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  8793. @section amovie
  8794. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  8795. stream by default.
  8796. @anchor{movie}
  8797. @section movie
  8798. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  8799. It accepts the following parameters:
  8800. @table @option
  8801. @item filename
  8802. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
  8803. device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
  8804. @item format_name, f
  8805. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  8806. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
  8807. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  8808. @item seek_point, sp
  8809. Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
  8810. starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
  8811. @code{av_strtod}, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  8812. postfix. The default value is "0".
  8813. @item streams, s
  8814. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  8815. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  8816. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  8817. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  8818. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  8819. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  8820. @item stream_index, si
  8821. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  8822. the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
  8823. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  8824. audio instead of video.
  8825. @item loop
  8826. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  8827. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  8828. Default value is "1".
  8829. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  8830. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  8831. @end table
  8832. It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
  8833. a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
  8834. @example
  8835. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  8836. ^
  8837. |
  8838. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  8839. @end example
  8840. @subsection Examples
  8841. @itemize
  8842. @item
  8843. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
  8844. on top of the input labelled "in":
  8845. @example
  8846. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8847. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8848. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8849. @end example
  8850. @item
  8851. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  8852. labelled "in":
  8853. @example
  8854. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8855. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8856. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8857. @end example
  8858. @item
  8859. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  8860. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  8861. connected to the pad named "audio":
  8862. @example
  8863. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  8864. @end example
  8865. @end itemize
  8866. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES